418
 I n t e r n a l U s e S A P P a r t n e r O n l y I   n  t   e r  n  a l   s  e  S  A P P  a r  t   n  e r  O   n l   y © SAP AG CR800 Preface-1 CR800 CRM E- Commerce (E- Selling, E-Service) FS310 Inkasso/Exkasso THE BEST RUN BUSINESSES RUN SAP  © SAP AG 200 4 CR800 CRM E-Commerce (E-Selling, E-Service)   SAP R/3 Enterprise – SAP CRM 4.0 (BBP release)  2004/Q2  Material number 50067916

CR800 Eselling

Embed Size (px)

DESCRIPTION

CR800 Eselling

Citation preview

Page 1: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 1/416

© SAP AG CR800 Preface-1

CR800 CRM E-

Commerce (E-Selling, E-Service)

FS310 Inkasso/Exkasso

THE BEST RUN BUSINESSES RUN SAP

© SAP AG 2004

CR800

CRM E-Commerce (E-Selling, E-Service)

 

  SAP R/3 Enterprise – SAP CRM 4.0 (BBP release)

  2004/Q2

  Material number 50067916

Page 2: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 2/416

© SAP AG CR800 Preface-2

SAP AG2004

Copyright 2004 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in

any form or for any purpose without the express permission of

SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed

without prior notice.

Copyright

 

Trademarks:

  Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other softwarevendors.

  Microsoft, Windows, Outlook, and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

  IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, OS/2, Parallel Sysplex, MVS/ESA, AIX, S/390, AS/400, OS/390, OS/400, iSeries,

 pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, z/OS, AFP, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere, Netfinity, Tivoli, and Informix are trademarks or

registered trademarks of IBM Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

  Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.

  UNIX, X/Open, OSF/1, and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group.

  Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame, VideoFrame, and MultiWin are trademarks or registered

trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.

  HTML, XML, XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium,

Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

  Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

  JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented

 by Netscape.  MaxDB is a trademark of MySQL AB, Sweden.

  SAP, R/3, mySAP, mySAP.com, xApps, xApp, and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their

respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the

world. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies. Data contained in this

document serves informational purposes only. National product specifications may vary.

  These materials are subject to change without notice. These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies

("SAP Group") for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP Group shall not be

liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those

that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be

construed as constituting an additional warranty.

Page 3: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 3/416

© SAP AG CR800 Preface-3

SAP AG2004

Prerequisites

Prerequisites:

CR100 mySAP CRM Base Customizing

Recommended:

 You may deepen your knowledge of SAP CRM 3.1 and SAP CRM

4.0 E-Commerce functionalities by studying the respective mySAP

CRM Learning Maps

CR700 CRM Service

 

Page 4: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 4/416

© SAP AG CR800 Preface-4

SAP AG2004

Target Group – Duration

Target Groups:

Employees of companies involved in implementing

mySAP CRM E-Commerce (E-Selling and E-Service)*

E-Commerce consultants

Duration:

Three days

* This course does not cover of the specific characteristics of the ISA

(SAP R/3 Edition).

For details on ISA (SAP R/3 Edition) please refer to course CR850.

 

Page 5: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 5/416

© SAP AG CR800 Preface-5

SAP AG2004

Course Objectives

This Course will enable you to:

Customize the mySAP CRM E-Commerce (E-Selling and E-Service)

scenarios

Outline the different features of the B2C and B2B Web shops

Customize the E-Commerce specific aspects of the CustomerRelationship Management (CRM) system.

Create and maintain your own catalog as well as your own Web shop

Enhance the Web shop with additional features such as Upselling,Accessories, Product Recommendations, Contract Negotiation,Request for Quotation, Batches, and so on

 

Page 6: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 6/416

© SAP AG CR800 Preface-6

SAP AG2004

Course Agenda

8. E-Servicea) Solution Search

b) Service Request Management

c) Complaints and Returns Managementin E-Commerce

9. E-Analytics

Appendix

Units

1. Foundation and Architecture

2. Shop and User Management

3. Catalog Setup

4. Order and Contract Processing

5. Price Determination and ATP

Check

6. Additional E-Selling Scenarios

7. E-Marketing

 

Page 7: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 7/416

© SAP AG CR800 Preface-7

SAP AG2004

Main Business Scenario

 You work for IDES, Inc. IDES, Inc. is a manufacturer of

Hardware and Software and uses SAP's R/3 system in

sales and distribution.

IDES, Inc. purchased the mySAP CRM E-Commerce

solution as a platform for selling its products on the World

Wide Web. Since the company deals with both business

partners and consumers, IDES, Inc. is going to set up a

B2B shop and a B2C shop offering different ranges of

products.

 You and your implementation team are responsible for

designing and implementing mySAP CRM E-Commerce.

 

Page 8: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 8/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-1

SAP AG2004

Foundation and Architecture

8. E-Servicea) Solution Search

b) Service Request Management

c) Complaints and Returns Managementin E-Commerce

9. E-Analytics

Appendix

Units

1. Foundation and Architecture

2. Shop and User Management

3. Catalog Setup

4. Order and Contract Processing

5. Price Determination and ATP

Check

6. Additional E-Selling Scenarios

7. E-Marketing

 

Page 9: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 9/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-2

SAP AG2004

Foundation and Architecture

E-Commerce within mySAP CRM

E-Selling Shops B2B and B2C)

E-Commerce within SAP Solution

Manager

E-Selling Architecture

 

Page 10: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 10/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-3

SAP AG2004

Foundation and Architecture: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Describe features and advantages of the mySAP CRM

E-Commerce solution

Explain how mySAP CRM E-Commerce is integrated in SAP

Solution Manager 

Describe the main components of the architecture

Delineate the usage of a Web shop within Channel Management

 

Page 11: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 11/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-4

SAP AG2004

Foundation and Architecture I

E-Commerce within mySAP CRM

Delivered E-Selling Shops B2B and B2C)

E-Commerce within the Solution

Manager

E-Selling Architecture

 

Page 12: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 12/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-5

SAP AG2004

Customer-Centric E-Business with mySAP CRM

The Solution is CompleteRich Functionality and Supporting Capabilities

 

  Today’s complex customer problems require a deployable CRM solution that can directly address

specific challenges regardless of where or when they occur in the cycle of interacting with, selling to,and servicing an organization’s customers.

  mySAP CRM blends deep functional capabilities in the core areas of marketing, sales, and service with

award-winning analytics that are directly embedded into the primary interaction channels with which

organizations engage their customers.

  All of this enables the closed loop interaction cycle, underlined by mySAP CRM‘s unique value

 propositions.

  mySAP CRM is built on an open, reliable, secure, and scalable technology platform.

  The strong and complete services offering of SAP helps to quickly implement mySAP CRM and

supports the ongoing optimization of the solution environment.

Page 13: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 13/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-6

SAP AG2004

Customer Centric Business with mySAP CRM

mySAP CRM E-Commerce

Turn the Web into a profitable sales and interaction channel

 

  The mySAP CRM E-Selling solutions provides:

  A complete solution that supports both B2B and B2C relationships. SAP provides templates thatcompanies can tailor to meet their specific business needs. These include B2B, B2C, as well as direct

and indirect selling scenarios.

  A personalized buying experience for customers so that sales, service, interactions, and information

are tailored specifically to the need to of each customer. Personalization of content, products, prices,

and interactions allow customers to receive a more relevant and effective interaction, resulting in

increased customer satisfaction and higher close rates.

  Convenient, easy-to-use, interactive selling and service. Customers have 24x7 access to all of the

information and processes that they need to purchase products and services and perform self-service

from your company. Customers have anytime access to product information, pricing, order, and

account status, and service history, as well as the ability to configure complex products or engage in

guided selling activities to help them select the best fit solution for their business needs. If the

information these customers need is not available online, they can immediately contact a customerservice representative, online, to resolve their questions through e-mail, call-back requests, chat, and

co-browsing.

  End-to-End processes that are fully-integrated from pre-sales to sales to fulfillment, to invoicing and

receivables, through post-sales services.

  In addition, mySAP CRM E-Selling enables you to extend your processes across your demand

network to incorporate partners into your E-Commerce strategy.

  Ultimately reduce your overall cost of sales with lower cost per sales transaction, reduced errors and

need for technical support, reduced human interaction for each sale, and lower number of calls to

your call center.

Page 14: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 14/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-7

SAP AG2004

E-Selling

E-Marketing

E-Service

E-Analytics

E-Selling

E-Marketing

E-Service

E-Analytics

mySAP CRM E-Commerce

mySAP CRM E-Commerce:

B2B shop

B2C shop

Best sellers

Internet Customer Self Service

Encompassing sales, service, and marketing interactions,

as well as analytical methods

 

E-Commerce

  mySAP CRM provides an E-Commerce platform that enables companies to turn the Internet into a

 profitable sales and interaction channel for both business customers and consumers. The E-Commerce

applications extend across the enterprise, encompassing sales, service, and marketing interactions, as

well as analytical methods.

E-Selling 

  This key area provides comprehensive capabilities for selling products and services via the Internet,

while creating a new, strategic sales channel. Organizations can provide customers with personalized,

interactive, and easy-to-use sales and self-services via the Web, and streamline sales and fulfillment

operations to enable an end-to-end order-to-cash process. Companies can support business-to-business

or business-to-consumer selling scenarios, while significantly reducing their cost of sales.

E-Service  Within a Web environment customers can take advantage of services such as:

  Knowledge management, which includes product-specific FAQs, advanced search capabilities, and

integrated knowledge bases

  Self-help services, which enable users to manage their accounts, installed bases, registered products,

service requests, complaints and returns, as well as view their contract and warranty entitlements

  Live Web collaboration, a tool which lets customers communicate with a service representative via e-

mail, Internet telephony, chat sessions, or collaborative sessions

Page 15: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 15/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-8

E-Analytics

  This scenario enables you to record system information and customer behavior from SAP Customer

 Relationship Management (SAP CRM). The recorded data can then be analyzed by the SAP Business

 Information Warehouse (SAP BW). E-Analytics in E-Commerce incorporates both the analysis oftechnical aspects regarding the availability and performance of Web servers and Web pages, and the

examination of customer behavior on individual Web pages.

Page 16: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 16/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-9

SAP's solutions for selling products over the Internet are SAP CRM E-Commerce and SAP Internet SalesR/3 Edition:

  SAP CRM E-Commerce

  Integral component of the SAP CRM system

  The Internet is considered to be a strategic sales channel

  Enhanced system architecture

  Larger range of functions (One-to-One Marketing, Guided Selling, advanced catalog maintenance,

catalog export functionality)

  SAP Internet Sales R/3 Edition:

  The customer works productively with the SAP R/3 system and wants to establish an additional saleschannel using the Internet

  This channel can be set up very quickly using the SAP ISA R/3 Edition

  Available for all SAP R/3 systems (as of release 4.0)

  Administration of majority of data in SAP R/3

  System architecture can be enhanced if required

Page 17: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 17/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-10

Page 18: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 18/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-11

  If you upgrade from Internet Sales R/3 Edition to SAP CRM E-Commerce, no new Web layout is

required. The same JSP files can also be used by SAP E-Commerce. The majority of the required effort

is in the installation and Customizing of the CRM server.

  This course covers the functionality SAP CRM E-Commerce (often also referred as CRM Internet

Sales). There is a separate course (CR850) on SAP Internet Sales R/3 Edition.

Page 19: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 19/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-12

SAP AG2004

mySAP CRM E-Commerce – Deployment Modes

E-Commerce with SAP CRM

E-Commerce with SAP R/3

E-Commerce within a Portal

mySAP CRM E-Commerce mySAP CRM Channel Management

E-Commerce with Channel Partners

Collaborative

Showroom

Partner Portal

For more information see class

CR870 CRM Channel Management

For more information see class

CR850 Internet Sales R/3 Edition

 

  With mySAP CRM Channel Management SAP delivers a fourth interaction channel between your

company and the customer in addition to your Sales force (Field), your call center (Interaction Center)and your Web shop (E-Commerce) for example. The focus of Channel Management is the indirect sales

achieved with the help of the partners of your company.

  E-Commerce with SAP R/3 (SAP Internet Sales R/3 Edition) enables companies to turn the Internet

into a profitable sales channel – without a CRM deployment (just using sales data and order

management from SAP R/3 SD).

  Enhancements through E-Commerce with SAP CRM by an upgrade from E-Commerce with SAP

 R/3 include:

  Marketing and personalization (including cross/up selling, related accessories, bestseller-list)

  Rule based ATP check using APO

  Super User Concept

  Call-off from contracts

  Guided Selling

  E-Service (Internet Customer Self Service)

  Live customer support (Live Web Collaboration)

  E-Commerce within a Portal: See next slide

Page 20: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 20/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-13

SAP AG2004

Customer Portal: E-Commerce within a Portal

Web shop

E-Service

Billing

 Biller direct)

E-Analytics

The Customer Portal provides a single point of access to

E-Selling, E-Service, and Online Support and Self-Services

 

  Customer Portal features:

  Direct access to sales and service applications

  Single sign-on

  Full contact history of sales and service activities

  Personal product recommendations

  News and information pushed to customers

  Service Center & Dealer locator (partner locator)

  Online billing and payment

  Personalization features

  Access to live support

  Administrative self-services

  Billing: You can integrate mySAP FSCM – Biller Direct to your customer portal to enable online

 billing and payment (additional licensing of mySAP FSCM– Biller Direct is required). User

Management for applications like the Web shop and Biller Direct will we based on the User

Management Engine (UME) of the portal to enable single-sign-on access.

Page 21: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 21/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-14

  As an alternative, Biller Direct can also be used with the Web shop without the portal (if you call Biller

Direct from the Web shop, the Web shop needs to create a SS02 Ticket, which in turn needs to be

accepted by Biller Direct).

  Benefits: Usage of Biller Direct from the Web shop:

  Web based billing and payment for available as self-service for customers

  Maintenance of master data (like additional credit cards or bank accounts)

Page 22: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 22/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-15

SAP AG2004

Accessing a solutions database

Frequently asked questions

Creating and updating service requests

Complaint handling Maintaining installed base components

Searching for service contracts

Example Customer Portal: The Workset “Services”

The Workset Services gives the portal user access to the E-Service

functionality of mySAP CRM. Service functions include self-service

activities such as:

 

  E-Service will be discussed in detail later.

Page 23: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 23/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-16

SAP AG2004

Channel Management: E-Comm. with Channel Partners

Collaborative Showroom

Joint Web shop offering of 

the brand owner and his

channel partners to

customers

Partner Portal

Brand owners provide

partners with self-service

capabilities, as well asrelevant information and

content, critical business

transactions and powerful

analytics.

Incorporate partners in your E-Commerce strategy and

enable collaborative selling across organizational

boundaries

Channel

Manager 

Customer 

Channel

Partner 

 

  The goal of CRM Channel Management is to increase profitability in the indirect sales channel (that is,

via partners).

  E-Selling is multi-dimensional:

  Customers interact with the partners of the manufacturer and use Web shop or Customer Portal

  Partners interact with the manufacturer and with the customer and use Partner Portal

  Employees in the manufacturer's company interact with partners and use Channel Manager Portal

  Collaborative Showroom enables brand owners to host a Web shop for collaborative online sales and

marketing of products and services. Customers have a single point of access to browse and purchase

from across the entire partner network.

  Partner Portal – Companies can use this portal to inform their partners about new products, distribute

collateral and documentation, convey company news, offer training courses, and announce upcoming promotions. It supports key processes that companies undertake with partners, including lead

management, the creation and tracking of sales and purchase orders, collateral procurement, and

analytics.

Page 24: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 24/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-17

SAP AG2004

Channel Management Example: Lead Management

Manufacturer Partner Customer  

Lead Customer Visit / Call

Partner Orders Order-on-Behalf (of Customer)

Delivery to Customer 

Billing Document

Commission Information

For more information see class

CR870 CRM Channel Management

 

  Purpose of Lead Management with Channel Partners: Distribution of new leads to the partner with the

skills and expertise to best meet the customer’s needs.

  You can use this business scenario to automate your initial pre-sales process by streamlining the

capture, distribution, qualification, and analysis of leads in the channel management context. This frees

up your sales department to focus on the most valuable prospects. With the help of leads you can

 provide a streamlined link between marketing and sales so as to accelerate the process between first

interest and sales.

  In this scenario, leads are created with relevant contextual information either by the brand owner or the

channel partner. If created by the brand owner, they are routed to the appropriate partners. After the

 partner accepts the lead, the partner contacts the related customer and further qualifies the lead. Based

on the on the response from the customer, the partner updates the lead status and converts it to an order-

on-behalf, if required. At the end of this process, the channel manager updates the lead metrics to

optimize future lead routings.

  This scenario also facilitates various roles, such as Lead Manager, Channel Manager, Partner Manager,

and Partner Employee. Your interaction center agents or sales representatives can also use this feature

  Partner Orders/Order-on-Behalf: Within the partner portal the partner can either:

  Create a Partner Order via the Partner Shop

  Create an Order-on-Behalf via the Customer Shop

Page 25: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 25/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-18

SAP AG2004

Foundation and Architecture II

E-Commerce within mySAP CRM

Delivered E-Selling Shops B2B and B2C)

E-Commerce within the Solution

Manager

E-Selling Architecture

 

  With CRM 4.0 the user interface of the B2B Web shop was changed as follows:

  New header concept

-  Separate document processing from catalog navigation

  New navigation concept

-  One central navigation area at top with sub-level navigation in the navigator

  No more tabs for document handling

Page 26: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 26/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-19

SAP AG2004

Business-to-Consumer Scenario: Example

A customer (consumer)

browses in the personalized

Web shop and searches for a

specific product. She is also

interested in the productproposals.

She adds two products to

her shopping basket,

checks for accessories, and

views the suggested cross-

and up-selling products.

An availability check for

her selected products is

performed to confirm the

requested delivery date.

The customer changes the delivery

address, selects payment via credit

card, and orders.

The order is automatically

transferred to the backend system.

One day later the

customer checks

the order status.

B2C Web shopB2C Web shop

Consumer 

 

Features of the B2C Shop:

  Registration as consumer

  Product recommendations

  Quick search in product catalog

  Compare products

  Product configuration

  Price information

  Save data and call up shopping basket

  Delivery addresses can be changed (at header level)

  Several payment methods are supported (invoice, cash on delivery, credit card)

  Delivery type can be chosen

  Text attachment can be added to the order

  Order confirmation

  Search through orders

  Check status

Page 27: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 27/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-20

  Catalog and Order Mgmt. B2B for Occasional Users: Within this scenario it is possible to use a B2C

shop not with a consumer but a customer (enabling a customer to use a B2C shop). Set up: Maintain

XCM scenario b2boccasionalcrm.

Page 28: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 28/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-21

SAP AG2004

Business-to-Business Scenario: Example

A business partner logs on

to the personalized Web

shop. His specific catalog

view is displayed.

Back in the catalog he searches

for additional products, checks the

suggested cross- and up-selling

products and adds some of them

to the order.

He realizes that one of the

products is part of a

contract. After viewing the

contract details, he adds

this product to the order.

An availability check

is performed to

confirm the requested

delivery date.

He changes the delivery

address for specific line

items and orders.

The order is automatically

transferred to the backend

system.

He knows the material

number of some items and

adds them to his shopping

basket by entering these

numbers directly.

One day later the

customer checks

the order status.

B2B Web shopB2B Web shop

Consumer 

 

Features of the B2B Web shop:

  Personalized views

  Product recommendations

  Customer-specific pricing in Web catalog and basket

  Quick search in product catalog

  Compare products

  Quick order entry

  Product configuration

  Online availability check in catalog

  Order templates

  Save data and call up shopping basket

  Delivery addresses, type, and date can be set on item and header lever

  Payment based on general terms and conditions in master data for the corresponding business partner

  Text attachment for order and/or item

Page 29: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 29/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-22

  Order confirmation

  Display of quotations, orders, order templates, contracts, invoices, credit memos, and down payments

  Check status (open, completed, partially delivered, cancelled)

  Change order (depending on fulfillment status)

  Request for quotation

  Contracts and contract negotiation

  Price analysis in basket

  Batches in basket

  Live Web collaboration

Page 30: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 30/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-23

SAP AG2004

Foundation and Architecture III

E-Commerce within mySAP CRM

Delivered E-Selling Shops B2B and B2C)

E-Commerce within the Solution

Manager

E-Selling Architecture

 

Page 31: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 31/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-24

SAP AG2004

E-Commerce within the Solution Manager 

• Configuration Structures

mySAP CRM 4.0

• Basic Settings for E-Commerce

• Special Settings for ISA (R/3 Edition)

• Special Settings for E-Service

• Special Settings for E-Selling

• Scenarios

E-Commerce

• Catalog and Order Mgmt…

• Configuration Structures

mySAP CRM 4.0

• Basic Settings for E-Commerce

• Special Settings for ISA (R/3 Edition)

• Special Settings for E-Service

• Special Settings for E-Selling

• Scenarios

E-Commerce

• Catalog and Order Mgmt…

E-Commerce specific content:

 

  With CRM 4.0 all configuration content for E-Commerce can be found within the SAP Solution

Manager. Within the SAP Solution Manager you can generate your own installation guide specific tothe chosen scenario.

  Under Configuration Structures you find basic settings (for example, E-Service) that you need to

apply regardless of the chosen E-Service scenario.

  Under Scenarios you find all scenario-specific configuration.

  Please keep in mind that for E-Commerce you have to apply the basic settings for mySAP CRM and

Sales.

Page 32: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 32/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-25

SAP AG2004

Scenarios (E-Commerce) within the Solution Manager 

Catalog and Order Mgmt…

In B2B in E-Commerce

In B2C in E-Commerce

In B2B for Occasional Users

With External Catalog Integration

With One-Step Business

Contract Management

Interactive Selling and Configuration

Live Web Collaboration

Shop Management

Web Auctions

Catalog and Order Mgmt…

In B2B in E-Commerce

In B2C in E-Commerce

In B2B for Occasional Users

With External Catalog Integration

With One-Step Business

Contract Management

Interactive Selling and Configuration

Live Web Collaboration

Shop Management

Web Auctions

E-Selling

Complaints and Returns Management

Service Request Management

Solution Search

Complaints and Returns Management

Service Request Management

Solution Search

E-Service

E-Commerce scenarios based on ISA (R/3 Edition) not listed

E-Commerce scenarios:

 

  Catalog and Order Management in E-Commerce: Provides a centralized product catalog and enables

Web customers to receive quotations or place orders for products and services. This scenario isdelivered with a selection of scenario variants, each differing in specific processes.

  Contract Management: Enables you to create long-term agreements that contain information about

 prices and products for customers or group of customers.

  Interactive Selling and Configuration: Provides customers with a rich online shopping experience

that helps them choose the products and services that best meet their business needs. Multimedia

content, guided selling, configuration advice, and real-time pricing empowers customers with all of the

information that they need to make an online purchasing decision without human intervention.

  Live Web Collaboration: Assists customers who have queries or encounter problems while using the

Web shop (integration with the CRM Interaction Center).

  Shop Management: As a Web shop manager, you can use this business scenario to create, view,

change or delete Web shops.

  Web Auctions: Selling via e-Bay.

  Not listed on the slide are the following E-Commerce scenarios based on ISA (R/3 Edition):

  Catalog and Order Mgmt. B2B for Internal Users in ISA (R/3 Edition)

  Catalog and Order Mgmt. B2B ISA (R/3 Edition)

  Catalog and Order Mgmt. B2C ISA (R/3 Edition)

  Catalog and Order Mgmt. B2B for Occasional Users in ISA (R/3 Edition)

  Catalog and Order Mgmt. with External Catalog in ISA (R/3 Edition)

Page 33: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 33/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-26

SAP AG2004

Foundation and Architecture IV

E-Commerce within mySAP CRM

Delivered E-Selling Shops B2B and B2C)

E-Commerce within the Solution

Manager

E-Selling Architecture

 

Page 34: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 34/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-27

  The following components are required for SAP Internet Sales:

  CRM Server, IPC, Index Server and SAP J2EE Engine, Browser

  TREX = Index Management Service (IMS) system consisting of two parts:

  IMS base component

-  Realized in ABAP system (CRM base component)

-  Creating, deleting, indexing, and updating of indexes

  IMS search server: Trex (formerly called DrFuzzy)

Page 35: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 35/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-28

SAP AG2004

SAP Internet Sales: Efficient Load Distribution

Front Office Service

20%

Backend

Execution

4-5%

Web Platform

75%

CRMSAP R/3

.

.

.IPC

Index (IMS)

CatalogConditions

ConfigurationKnowledge

Quotation/availability check

Personalization

Order 

Front Office Service

20%

Execution

4-5%

Web Platform

75%

Front End

The user interaction in Web stores generates a typical workload 

Order 

Picking,packaging,shipping

Browse through catalog

Search

Configure and price

Choose

 

Page 36: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 36/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-29

SAP AG2004

J2EE Application Server consists of:

Web Container 

(  server-side presentation)

EJB (Enterprise Java Beans) Container 

(  Server-Side Business Logic - not used for Internet Sales,

therefore CRM business logic is used)

J2EE based services used by Web Container and EJB Container 

(  e.g. security, naming)

J2EE

2EE

Application

pplication

Server

erver

Web Container 

ServletsServletsServlet

JSP

Services

EJB Container 

EJB

EJB

EJB

What is a J2EE Application Server?

 

  CRM 3.0/3.1 and CRM 4.0

  JSP/Struts enabled WebShop

-  Business logic and backend access realized in Java

-  Flow logic realized by Struts action concept

-  UI realized by JSP and Java taglibs

Page 37: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 37/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-30

SAP AG2004

<html>

<b>This is a simple JSP</b>

<p>

<% out.println("Hello Fred");

%>

</html>

Java Server Pages

A textual document describing how to create a response from a request

Separation of static and dynamic content

Static content (HTML, Plain Text, XML)

Dynamic content (Scripts, Directives)

JSP pages are good at producing lots of textual output

Not well suited for business logic

 

  Definition: Java Server Pages are text based documents capable of returning dynamic content to a client

 browser. Java Server Pages can contain a mix of markup code (such as HTML and XML), programming code (Java code and so on), and special JSP tags allowing access to components such as

Java Beans.

  Advantage of JSP: An integrated solution for generating and returning dynamic Web page content such

as HTML or XML to a client browser.

  JSP (Java Server Pages) replaces the SAP proprietary technology (ITS, Flow Logic)

  Web technology based on open, widespread, state-of-the-art standards.

  New JSP technology runs on Java web application servers (for example, SAP J2EE Engine, IBM

Webshere).

  No changes in CRM business logic (ABAP), the same APIs are used. Migration effort limited to

frontend.

  More openness to incorporate customer specific applications and third-party products (full outside-

in).

  Environment for professional Web design without limits (layout, interaction logic).

Page 38: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 38/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-31

SAP AG2004

Presentation

SAP Internet Sales Architecture in Detail

Browser 

Interaction and Presentation Layer 

Business Objects Layer 

EIS  CRM IMS IPCother systems,

e.g. SAP R/3

SAP JavaSAP Java Connector Connector 

BLS Layer 

J2EE Application Server 

Internet Sales Web Application

XCM

Other Other connectorsconnectorse.ge.g.. socketssockets /JDBC /JDBC

JSP = Java Server Pages

BO = Business ObjectsBLS = Business Logic

Services

EIS = Enterprise InformationSystem

XCM = Extended

Configuration Management

JSP = Java Server Pages

BO = Business ObjectsBLS = Business Logic

Services

EIS = Enterprise Information

System

XCM = Extended

Configuration Management

 

The JAVA application in the Interaction Layer is subdivided in three levels:

  Interaction and presentation Layer (consisting of Struts & JSPs):

In this level HTTP user requests are received and it is decided how they are processed. Dependent on

the user request, the appropriate action is loaded and the relevant Java classes from the Business Object

Layer is processed. The control logic is determined here.

  Business Object Layer (BO Layer):

The Business Object Layer consists of Java classes, which represent the Business Objects (e.g., basket

or catalog). It forms a sturdy and slim interface (only a few methods are available). Additional, logic for

the individual customer must be implemented in these Business Object Layer.

  Enterprise Application Layer (EAI Layer)

The Enterprise Application Layer forms a broad interface in contrast to the Business Object Layer,

which provides interfaces to the Business Object Layer existing business objects. The interface to a business object (e.g., basket) can possess arbitrary implementations for different Enterprise Information

Systems (EIS) (e.g., basket for CRM and basket for IPC). Communication of the JAVA application

with the CRM and IMS is made possible over the JAVA Connector of the SAP system. Communication

of the JAVA application with the IPC is made by Sockets.

Page 39: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 39/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-32

SAP AG2004

Deployment – Tools and Tasks

Deployment with SDM

• Select all deployment parameters correctly

at the beginning

• Create parameter directory where customer

places own files before deploymentImportant: Outside the J2EE Engine installation dir 

Deployment with SDM

• Select all deployment parameters correctly

at the beginning

• Create parameter directory where customerplaces own files before deploymentImportant: Outside the J2EE Engine installation dir 

Upgrade with SDM

• Under Parameter Deployment

Configuration, select use existing

deployment parameters Upgrade finished

Upgrade with SDM

• Under Parameter Deployment

Configuration, select use existing

deployment parameters Upgrade finished

Configuration with XCM

• During startup XCM copies customer

parameters in the created directory

• Configuration of application with XCM all

files are stored in customer directory

Configuration with XCM

• During startup XCM copies customer

parameters in the created directory

• Configuration of application with XCM all

files are stored in customer directory

Modification with ISA build tool

• The ISA build tool is based on Apache Ant

• Ant is the most common build tool for Java applications

Modification with ISA build tool

• The ISA build tool is based on Apache Ant

• Ant is the most common build tool for Java applications

 

Use:

  SDM for deployment

  XCM for configuration and upgrade

  Build Tool for modifications

  Software Delivery Manager (SDM)

  Internet Sales 4.0 Web applications must be deployed with SDM

  Maintain deployment parameters for Web application (EAR files)

  Deployment parameters are saved to the Web application’s web.xml file

  Further changes possible via Extended Configuration Management (XCM)

  Build Tool

  Supports building of project specific Web applications based on the Internet Sales applications

-  Separation of project specific code and code delivered by SAP

-  Automated build of project specific applications

-  Software Delivery Manager (SDM) support for project specific applications

  Standardized process for upgrading modified Web applications to a newer support pack or a newer

release

Page 40: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 40/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-33

SAP AG2004

Extended Configuration Management (XCM):

(Replacing WEB.xml context parameters with XCM)

Tool which divides configuration data for E-Commerce in two types: Data maintained by SAP

 This data must not be changed by the customer 

Data maintained by the customer 

Extended Configuration Management (XCM):

(Replacing WEB.xml context parameters with XCM)

Tool which divides configuration data for E-Commerce in two types:

Data maintained by SAP

 

This data must not be changed by the customer 

Data maintained by the customer 

Extended Configuration Management (XCM)

Goal of this concept: Clear separation of SAP and customer configuration.

  SAP CRM has introduced a new concept for Java applications (Internet Sales, ICSS, IPC Web

Application) called Extended Configuration Management (XCM).  The customer can use the XCM admin tool to modify his or her configuration after deployment. The

configuration will remain even after updating the Web applications (in contrast to changes directly in

the web.xml).

  The XCM Administrator tool has been developed for common configuration activities (e.g., connection

 parameters to SAP system).

  Please note that the XCM Administrator cannot be used for less common settings. In this case

configuration changes must be done manually. Modification data is rarely changed and therefore not

maintained by the XCM Admin tool. This customer modification data is located in WEB-

INF/xcm/customer/modification. In most cases customer changes, done by customers, take place in init-

config.xml or backendobject-config.xml.

  You should never change the files config-data.xml or scenario-config.xml. This is done using XCM

administration.  Data maintained by SAP is located in the WEB-INF/xcm/sap folder.

  Data maintained by the customer is located in the \xcm\customer\modification folder.

  How the customer can use the XCM extension mechanism for manual configuration changes is

described in a separate document. This document is attached to note 673638.

  For further reference regarding how to create a XCM application configuration (old: scenario) with the

help of the XCM Administration Tool (e.g., CRM_AEP_800), please refer to the section on Extended

Configuration Management (XCM) in the following guides:

  CRM Web Application Installation Guide

  Java Components for E-Selling and Channel Management Installation Guide

Page 41: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 41/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-34

SAP AG2004

Foundation and Architecture: Unit Summary

You are now able to:

Describe mySAP CRM E-Commerce and the features and

advantages of this solution

Explain how mySAP CRM E-Commerce is integrated in SAP’s CRM

system

Describe the main components of the architecture

 

Page 42: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 42/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-35

Page 43: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 43/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-36

Exercises

Unit: Foundation and Architecture

Topic: Internet Sales Scenarios

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:

•  Describe the B2C and the B2B scenarios of Internet Sales and discusstheir specific functions

Your task is to demonstrate the business processes of Internet Sales.

Before doing so, you need to take a look at the B2B and B2C scenarios.

1 Look at the visual design, procedures, and basic functionality of the B2C scenario.

http://<webserver:port>b2c/b2c/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X 

The last X stands for the last digit of your client.

Example: If your CRM client is 801, type:

http://…?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM801 

1-1 Enter the specified URL in your Web browser and call up the B2C

scenario of Internet Sales.

Choose the WebShop PC4YOU_EN.

You will see the welcome page with the Special offers. 

Browse through the Catalog until you reach the Monitors catalog area. 

Go to the Detail  view of product HT-1036 and then add this product to your

shopping basket.

Page 44: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 44/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-37

1-2 To receive personalized product recommendations, you have to maintain your

 personal data.

You only need to maintain personal data if you want toreceive personalized product recommendations. To

maintain your customer profile, you first have to create auser.

Create a user.

Title: Mr. or Mrs.

First Name: ________________________________________

 Name: ________________________________________

House No. and Street: ________________________________________

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

City Antioch

 Region Il for Illinois

 Postal Code 60002 

Country United States

(Use this address or any other valid US-address - otherwise the Tax

 jurisdiction code can not be found).

E-mail address: ________________________________________

Password (twice): ________________________________________

Save your entries.

1-3 Create a customer profile. The customer profile consists of a series of

attributes (preferred Contact Channel and so on) that will be used to provide

the customer with product recommendations.

To create a personal profile and save it in the CRM system, you assign valuesto the attributes.

Select the desired values and choose Save customer profile. 

Page 45: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 45/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-38

1-4 Browse through the catalog. Choose Computer and search for the product

R-1000C (under Configurable Systems).

Configure this computer as you wish.

1-5 Go to your shopping basket and then to checkout.Because you are still logged in under your user name, you do not have toreenter your user ID. If you had not logged in with your user name before, you

will be asked to do so now. You can log on by entering your e-mail address

and your password.

Specify that you are going to pay by invoice and are satisfied with theStandard  Delivery Type.

The order data including the order number now displays.

Make a note of the order number:

 ____________________________________________________

2 Check the entries in the CRM system.

2-1 Log on to the appropriate CRM system.

2-2 Check whether the sales order you created in the last step of the exercise is in

the CRM system. (The sales order is also processed by the R/3.)SAPmenu → Sales → Maintain Sales Transactions. 

Use the search function by selecting the Open  Business Transaction 

 pushbutton. Enter the order number from the previous exercise and choose

 Enter .Make a note of the number that the system has assigned for your sold-to party.

 ______________________________

2-3 Check that a business partner master has been created in the CRM system.

SAPmenu → Master Data → Business Partner → Maintain Business Partner

Enter the specified business partner number and look at the customer master

record.

Page 46: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 46/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-39

3 Check the entries in R3. (Optional) 

3-1 Check whether the sales order you have created exists in the OLTP system.

3-2 Check whether a business partner master has also been created in the OLTP

system.Choose the following path: Logistics→ Sales and Distribution → Master Data

→ Business partners → Customer → Display→ Sales and Distribution or

Complete

4 Look at the visual design, procedures, and basic functions of the B2B scenario.

URL: 

http://<webserver:port>/b2b/b2b/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

The last X stands for the last digit of your client.Example: If your CRM client is 801, please type:

http://…?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM801 

4-1 Log on to the B2B scenario and choose the WebShop PC4BIZ_EN.

For the B2B scenario, you must enter a user (contact person) name and password to access the WebShop. For the exercises, you can use the following

contact person: 233 (Mr. Miller), password welcome.

Go to the order entry screen and add product HT-1050.

Check the different delivery addresses. Change the default address.

Create an order.

4-2  What differences did you notice between the B2B and B2C scenarios?

 ________________________________________________________

 ________________________________________________________

 ________________________________________________________

Page 47: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 47/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-40

(optional)

Unit: Foundation and Architecture

Topic: Status Change

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:

•  Describe and explain the order status mechanism between R3 – CRMand Internet Sales

•  Process the created order in the backend system and check the statuschanges in CRM and in the WebShop

5 Process the created order in the backend system and check the status changes in CRMand in the WebShop

5-1 Check the status of your order in the CRM system.

SAPmenu → Sales → Maintain Sales Transactions 

Look at the Status tab. What is the current status of the order?

Attention: Please leave transaction!

5-2 Check the status of your order in the WebShop. Log on to the WebShopPC4YOU_EN and look at your Open Orders.

5-3 Create a delivery to the order in R3.

 Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→ 

Outbound Delivery→ Create→ Single Document→ With Reference to SalesOrder

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

Shipping point 3800

Selection date One week in the future

Order Order number from created order

Page 48: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 48/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-41

5-4 Now check the status of the order in the CRM system and in the WebShop

again and note the new entries. 

Page 49: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 49/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-42

Solutions

Unit: Foundation and Architecture

Topic: Internet Sales Scenarios

1 Look at the visual design, procedures, and basic functionality of the B2C WebShop.

http://<webserver:port>b2c/b2c/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

The last “X” stands for the last digit of your client.

Example: If your CRM client is 801, please type:

http://…?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM801 

1-1 Enter the specified URL in your Web browser and call up the B2C scenario of

Internet Sales.

Choose the Web Shop PC4YOU_EN.

You will see the welcome page with the Special offers 

Browse through the Catalog until you reach the catalog area Monitors 

Go to the detail view of product HT-1036 and then add this product to your

shopping basket.

Select the product description and then the Add to  Shopping Basket  button.

1-2 To receive personalized product recommendations, you have to maintain your

 personal data.

You only need to maintain personal data if you want to

receive personalized product recommendations. Tomaintain your customer profile, you first have to create a

user.

Create a user.

Select My Account in the menu and choose the link Register . Maintain the

following values:

Title: Mr. or Mrs.

First Name: ________________________________________

 Name: ________________________________________

Page 50: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 50/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-43

House No. and Street: ________________________________________

Page 51: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 51/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-44

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

City Antioch

 Region Il for Illinois

 Postal Code 60002 

Country United States

Use this address or any other valid US-address – otherwise the Tax jurisdictioncode can not be found).

E-mail address: _________________________________________

Password (twice): ________________________________________

Save your entries.

Choose the Save button.

1-3 Create a customer profile. The customer profile consists of a series of

attributes (preferred Contact Channel and so on) that will be used to provide

the customer with product recommendations.

To create a personal profile and save it in the CRM system, you assign valuesto the attributes.

In the menu, choose My account  and then My Profile on the left. 

Select the desired values and choose Save customer profile. 

1-4 Browse through the catalog. Choose the area Computer and search for the product R-1000C (under Configurable Systems).

Configure this computer as you wish.

Choose the Configuration icon and maintain all the required entries .

Page 52: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 52/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-45

1-5 Go to your shopping basket and then to checkout.

Click on Shopping Basket on the right hand side. 

Because you are still logged on under your user name, you do not have to

reenter your user ID. If you had not logged in with your user name before, youwould be asked to do so now. You can log on by entering your e-mail address

and your password.

Choose the Go to checkout button. 

Specify that you are going to pay by invoice and are satisfied with Delivery

Type Standard .

Now select the Continue button, then accept the general terms and

conditions and execute the Order. 

The order data including the order number now displays.

Make a note of the order number:

 ____________________________________________________

2 Check the entries in the CRM system.

2-1 Log on to the appropriate CRM system.

2-2 Check whether the sales order you created in the last step of the exercise is in

the CRM system. (The sales order is also processed by R/3.)SAPmenu → Sales → Maintain Sales Transactions. 

Use the search function by selecting the Open  Business Transaction  pushbutton. Enter the order number from the last exercise and choose Enter .

 Note the number that the system has assigned for your sold-to party.

This number can be found on the General  tab page.

 ______________________________

2-3 Check that a business partner master has been created in the CRM system.

SAPmenu → Master Data → Business Partner → Maintain Business Partner

Enter the specified business partner number and look at the customer master

record.

Choose Persons in the Find  field, maintain the number, and choose Enter .

Then double click on the Business Partner 

Page 53: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 53/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-46

3 Check the entries in the R3 system. (Optional) 

3-1 Check whether the sales order you have created exists in the SAP R/3 system.

Choose the following menu path: Logistics Sales and Distribution

 Sales Order Display

Enter the order number that you noted.

3-2 Check whether a business partner master has also been created in the SAP R/3

system.

Choose the following menu path: Logistics Sales and Distribution

 Master Data Business partners Customer Display Sales and

 Distribution or Complete

Enter the business partner number that you noted.

4 Look at the visual design, procedures, and basic function of the B2B scenario.

URL: http://<webserver:port>/b2b/b2b/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X

The last “X” stands for the last digit of your client.

Example: If your CRM client is 801, type:

http://…?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM801 

4-1 Log on to the B2B scenario and choose the WebShop PC4BIZ_EN.For the B2B scenario, you must enter a user name (contact person) and

 password to access the WebShop. For the exercises, you can use the following

contact person: 233 (Mr. Miller), password welcome.

Go to the order entry screen and add product HT-1050.

Select Go! on the right hand side of New Transaction Create Order.

Maintain product HT-1050 in quantity 1.

Select the Update button. 

Check the different delivery addresses. Change the default address.

Select one of the addresses available in the pull-down menu in the Deliverto address column at heater level. 

Create an order.

Choose the Order button and confirm with OK.

Page 54: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 54/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-47

4-2 What differences did you notice between the B2B and B2C scenarios?

B2B: Log in as contact person

Direct input of a purchase order

Customer-specific pricing in the Web shop catalog

Availability Check in the Web shop catalog

Page 55: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 55/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-48

Page 56: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 56/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-49

(optional)

Unit: Foundation and Architecture

Topic: Status Change

5 Process the created order in the backend system and check the status changes in CRMand in the WebShop

5-1 Check the status of your order in the CRM system

SAPmenu → Sales → Maintain Sales Transactions 

Look at the Status tab. What is the current status of the order?

The status in Open.

Attention: Please leave transaction!

5-2 Check the status of your order in the WebShop. Log on to the WebShop

PC4YOU_EN and take a look at your Open Orders.

Enter the specified URL in your Web browser 

URL: 

http://<webserver:port>/b2b/b2b/init.do ?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

and call up the B2C scenario of Internet Sales. Choose the WebShop

PC4YOU_EN. Select My Account  and register. Select Open Orders and

then the Order number. The status is Open.

5-3 Create a delivery to the order in R3-System

 Logistics→ Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation→ 

Outbound Delivery→ Create→ Single Document → With Reference to Sales

Order

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

Shipping point 3800

Selection date One week in the future

Order Order number from created order

Enter and Save.

Page 57: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 57/416

© SAP AG CR800 1-50

5-4 Now check the status of the order in the CRM system and in the WebShop

again and note the new entries. 

In CRM, the status is Completed .

In WebShop PC4YOU_EN, now select Completed Orders and then on the

Order number . The status is Finished . 

Page 58: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 58/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-1

SAP AG2004

Shop and User Management

8. E-Servicea) Solution Search

b) Service Request Management

c) Complaints and Returns Managementin E-Commerce

9. E-Analytics

Appendix

Units

1. Foundation and Architecture

2. Shop and User Management

3. Catalog Setup

4. Order and Contract Processing

5. Price Determination and ATP

Check

6. Additional E-Selling Scenarios

7. E-Marketing

 

Page 59: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 59/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-2

SAP AG2004

Shop and User Management: Unit Overview

Shop Management

User Management

Super User Management

 

Page 60: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 60/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-3

SAP AG2004

Shop and User Management: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit you will be able to:

Set up a Web shop via a Web application

Customize the Web shop according to your specific needs

Customize the relevant user-settings for a B2B and B2C Shop

Log on to a B2B Web shop with your own user account

 

Page 61: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 61/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-4

SAP AG2004

Shop and User Management I

Shop Management

User Management

Super User Management

 

Page 62: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 62/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-5

SAP AG2004

Save the web shop data into

CRM back-end table

Save the web shop data into

CRM back-end table

Maintain the web shop settingsMaintain the web shop settings

New Web-based Shop Managementhttp://web-server:port/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do

New Web-based Shop Managementhttp://web-server:port/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do

Shop Management Process

• General Information

• Catalog

• Order 

• Marketing

……B2B

……B2C

Value 2Value 1Shop ID

 

  New Web-based Shop Management replaces the SAP GUI transaction.

  Convenient management of shop data in one central place.

Page 63: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 63/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-6

SAP AG2004

B2B Web Shop

Defining a Web Shop – Usage

Functions

Create New Shop for scenario

Display, Change and Delete Ex

Usage – Business Scenario:

B2C Web Shop

 

  The drop down list box allow you to select Internet Sales B2B, Internet Sales B2C, or Internet Sales

 B2C/B2B and specify whether the Web shop can be used in the B2B and/or the B2C scenario.

  Business-on-Behalf , Collaborative Showroom, and Hosted Order Management   are used in Channel

Management.

Page 64: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 64/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-7

SAP AG2004

 You have to maintain control areas for each Web shop

Define a Web Shop – Overview

General InformationGeneral Information•• Shop ID / description *Shop ID / description *

•• Business scenario *Business scenario *

••  Authorization Authorization

•• User Administration *User Administration *

CatalogCatalog•• Product Catalog data *Product Catalog data *

Control AControl Areasreas

MarketingMarketing•• Global ProductGlobal Product

RecommendationRecommendation

•• Personalized ProductPersonalized ProductRecommendationRecommendation

•• CrossCross--,Up,Up--Selling,Selling,

 Accessories Accessories

Order Order •• Order *Order *

•• QuotationsQuotations

•• ContractsContracts

•• Contract NegotiationsContract Negotiations

* = mandatory parameters

 

  Web shop controls areas:

  General Information:

-  The usage of business scenarios (B2B and/or B2C Internet Sales, Business-on-behalf,

Collaborative Showroom, Hosted Order Management)

-  Authorizations, User Administration

  Catalog:

-  Product Catalog data

  Order:

-  Order, Quotations, Contracts (B2B Internet Sales only), Contract Negotiations

  Marketing

-  Global Product Recommendation, Personalized Product Recommendation, Cross-, Up-Selling and

Accessories

Page 65: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 65/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-8

SAP AG2004

Define a Web Shop – General Information

General Information Catalog Order Marketing

Control ParametersControl Parameters

General Information:

Usage

Business Scenario

Authorizations

 Authorization Group

User Administration

Country group

Partner Function Contact Person

only for B2B scenario:

Authority group empty

  all users can enter shop

Authority group filled

  Only users with special

authorization can enter shop

 

  Usage: Name of the Business Scenario

  New Functionality with CRM 4.0:

  Authorization Group: Key that is used to manage the authorization for calling up the Internet Sales

Web shop. The corresponding authorization set is CRM_ISA_SP.

  Country group: Key that groups related countries according to certain criteria. The country grouping is

implemented during address maintenance in Internet Sales, to make a selection from all the countries in

the system.

  Partner Function Contact Person: After the user has logged on, the system uses this partner function to

determine the company that the contact person belongs to and which functions as the sold-to party.

Page 66: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 66/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-9

SAP AG2004

Define a Web Shop – Product Catalog

Catalog Search (B2B Internet Sales)

Catalog

Catalog variant

Hide internal catalog

Catalog View

Controlling Price Determination in the Catalog

A Web shop is based on the product catalogA Web shop is based on the product catalog

via IPC

Read from Index Server (List Prices)

General Information Catalog Order Marketing

Product Catalog

Control ParametersControl Parameters

Product Catalog:

 

  Select the product catalog and catalog variant that contain the correct content for the Web shop.

  Only one product catalog and one catalog variant can be published per Web shop. Both fields are

mandatory.

  With the field Catalog View you can determine specific catalog views and assign business partners to

them:

  For each Web shop you decide whether personalized catalog determination shall take place or if a

specific view is presented to all Web shop visitors.

  The check box Catalog Search controls the determination of personalized catalog views in B2B Internet

Sales. Select this field if you want to use catalog determination. Therefore, during logon in a Web shop,

the system determines the catalog views that are suitable for the user.

  Flag Hide internal catalog  is used to control whether the CRM product catalog is displayed.  Parameter Controlling Price Determination in the Catalog  facilitates price determination in a Web

shop.

Page 67: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 67/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-10

SAP AG2004

Define a Web Shop – Order (1/2)

Order

Order Type

Sales Office

CRM integrated availability check (SAP APO) or availability information (SAP R/3)

Internet Sales specific availability information using SAP R/3 (obsolet)

 Availability check control

General Information Catalog Order  Marketing

Control ParametersControl Parameters

Order:

 

  For B2C and B2B scenario:

  Order Type: Defines the characteristics and attributes of a business transaction (e.g., sales order,

service request, sales call) and specifies the control attributes (e.g., text determination procedure,

 partner determination procedure ).

  Sales Office: You can form purchasing groups (for example, departments) in a sales office with

specific sales responsibilities.

  Availability check control : Shows the relevant information in the Web shop.

Page 68: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 68/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-11

SAP AG2004

Shop and User Management II

Shop Management

User Management

Super User Management

 

Page 69: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 69/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-12

SAP AG2004

SAP R/3SAP R/3 SystemSystem

B2C Scenario: General Procedure

B2C Web Shop

Consumer 

registers

CRM SystemCRM System

UploadUpload

2

1

3

SAP R/3 customer master record

created

Automatic creation of a new

business partner master record

Role consumer

Classification consumer 

Data also retrieved from

Reference Business Partner 

for Consumers

SU01-user or SU05 creation

 

  Features of the B2C shop regarding the user management:

  Voluntary log-in, but necessary for personalization features and ordering

  Log-in with e-mail address and password

  When a customer registers in a Web shop, a business partner master record is automatically created

in mySAP CRM

  Business partner master record is completed using data from a reference business partner

  Registration:

  System checks if already a user with the same email/password combination already exists

  E-mail address is stored in business partner data

  Password is stored at SU05 internet user tables/SU01 user tables

Page 70: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 70/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-13

SAP AG2004

Registration: Address Screen Layouts

ISA supports two address

screen layouts:

United States

European Standard

How to find the right layout:

Country is taken from sales

organization (attribute in

organization model)

Address layout key is defined in

country settings (IMG) Mapping to ISA supported layouts

(IMG)

USUS

European StandardEuropean Standard

 

  The country is taken from the sales organization (attribute in the organizational model).

  Address layout key is defined in country settings (IMG):

  IMG Activity: Path in IMG: General Settings  Set Up Countries  Define Countries in

mySAP.com Systems

  Layout formats supported by mapping of address layout key to ISA (IMG):

  Path in IMG: CRM Internet Sales Define Address Formats

  The address screen layout is also used in the B2B shop for defining/changing a new delivery address (as

in the B2C scenario).

Page 71: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 71/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-14

SAP AG2004

Shop management: General Information

Registration: Selectable Countries

Web ShopWeb Shop Control ParametersControl Parameters Restrict address entry tocertain countries

Restrict address entry toRestrict address entry tocertain countriescertain countries

User Administration

Country gr oup

Registration

US

Define country groupsin Customizing

Define country groupsDefine country groupsin Customizingin Customizing

Title

First Name

Last Name

House No/ Street

City

Country

 

  The Country group field is used in the B2C Web shop when consumers register in the Web shop. When

specifying their personal data, consumers are also asked to enter their address (and country). Thecountry group controls which countries are supported in this Web shop (the delivery locations can be

restricted with this function). You can maintain the country group in Customizing (SPRO Customer

Relationship Management Internet Sales Define Country Groups). If no country group is entered

for the Web shop, all the countries maintained in the CRM system are supported in the Web shop.

  The maintenance of the Region field is only possible if a country group is maintained (region needed for

tax jurisdiction code determination).

  In the B2B scenario, the Country group controls the selection of countries if the delivery address

changes (as in the B2C scenario).

Page 72: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 72/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-15

SAP AG2004

B2C Scenario: Reference Business Partner 

Maintain the reference business partner in the

relevant sales areas

IDES US West (Denver) Internet Sales

IDES US West (Denver) Internet Sales Cross-division

Sales organization Distribution channel Division Sales Shipping BillDoc.

Maintained Distribution Areas

REFBURAReference Bus. Partner Name Reference business partner/US

 

  In the customizing of the CRM system you have to maintain a reference business partner via the IMG

activity Maintain Reference Business Partner for Consumers.

  Maintain this business partner in the following two sales areas:

  Sales organization of product catalog, distribution channel of product catalog, division <blank>

  Sales organization of product catalog, distribution channel of product catalog, division of product

master or SAP R/3 dummy division

  In the master record of this reference business partner for consumers maintain the set types Sales,

Shipping, and Billing.

  By this you maintain data that will not be specified by the consumer when he or she registers in the

Web shop (customer pricing procedure, terms of delivery, terms of payment, and so on).

  All company code relevant data are maintained in the SAP R/3 via transaction VD07 (ReferenceBusiness Partner for B2C Customer).

Page 73: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 73/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-16

SAP AG2004

B2B Scenario Overview

B2B Web Shop

Log on Change Password

User ID

KWiga

Password

********

Customer(contact person)

logs on to

B2B Web Shop

User Management (UM)

User ID*

E-mail*

For the companies

Authorizations*

SAP R/3SAP R/3 SystemSystemCRM SystemCRM System

DownloadDownload

A customer master record

Automatic creation of

Sold-to party (from SAP R/3)

Contact Person (from UM)

Internet User (from UM)

14

5

 

  Features of the B2B shop regarding the user management:

  Mandatory log in before entering the Web shop

  Contact persons created by Web shop administrator

  User concept (two different user types available)

  B2B for occasional users:

  B2C Templates can be used with B2B user Late login possible for B2B

  Common B2B login problems:

  Within the Shop Management the field Partner Function Contact Person does not have the value

0000015

  Anonymous user not of user type SERVICE

  Anonymous user password in web xml different to CRM

  User/contact has no relationship to sold to’s

  User has no authorizations

  User comparison for role needed (Report PFUD)

  User locked because of wrong login tries

  The CRM system allows one password change per day

 Consulting Note 506407

 Consulting Note 395098

Page 74: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 74/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-17

SAP AG2004

Creation and maintenance of B2B Internet User (contact person concept) for companies

Available functions: Internet user creation

Company assignment (supported by company search)

Role assignment

Copying data of existing Internet user 

Search for existing Internet users

Maintenance of Internet user 

Lock/unlock

Password reset

Change of user data

Change of company assignment

Change of role assignment

Delete Internet user 

E-mail notification

(new user/password reset)

Creation and maintenance of B2B Internet User (contact person concept) for companies

Available functions: Internet user creation

Company assignment (supported by company search)

Role assignment

Copying data of existing Internet user 

Search for existing Internet users

Maintenance of Internet user 

Lock/unlock

Password reset

Change of user data

Change of company assignment Change of role assignment

Delete Internet user 

E-mail notification

(new user/password reset)

User Management: B2B Internet User 

 

This functionality can be used by a Web shop administrator (seller side) or a Super User (buyer side).

User Management URL: http://<Webserver:port>/useradmin/useradmin/init.do 

For each B2B contact person, a BP partner and Internet user are created within the CRM.

  Customizing:

1. Internet Sales Internet User User Settings

  Set User Administration (since 3.1): Adjust the ISA web user administration

  Set Roles for User Administration (since 3.1)

-  Introduces all roles that can be assigned to internet users in the ISA web user administration

  Enter reference users for internet user administration (since 4.0)

2. Internet Sales Internet User Internet User Settings

  Set B2B Internet User must be set to Only use Internet user  (SU01)

Page 75: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 75/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-18

SAP AG2004

B2B Scenario Overview: Existing Contact Person

B2B Web Shop

Log on Change Password

User ID

Miller 

Password

********

Customer(contact person)

logs on to

B2B Web Shop

SAP R/3SAP R/3 SystemSystemCRM SystemCRM System

DownloadDownload A customer master record

with a maintained contact

person0

Automatic creation of two

business partners:1. Sold-to party

2. Contact person

Manual creation of Internet

User 

1

3

 

  If contact persons for a given company already exist, you can create Internet user directly within the

CRM. With the web application User Management you can create new contact persons.

  One advantage of the User Management is that users can be created portal enabled. Login to a portal

with that user is possible then as well.

Manual creation of an Internet User:

  Either via transaction SU05 (for an SU05 user) or via the business master of the contact person - role:

Internet User- (for an SU01 User).

Page 76: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 76/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-19

SAP AG2004

Needed for:

• Business logic

• Business processes• Business master data

Needed for:

• Business logic

• Business processes• Business master data

Needed for:

• Authentication

• Authorization (profiles, roles, ref. user)• Menu (portal)

Needed for:

• Authentication

• Authorization (profiles, roles, ref. user)

• Menu (portal)

Difference between Internet User and Business Partner 

Business

usiness

Partnerartner

Linked by central person object (SU01) or 

by using the same Identification (SU05)

Internetnternet

User

ser

 

  Within SAP CRM two types of Internet users exist:

  SU05 user (usage not longer recommended by SAP)

-  Transaction SU05

-  Use of Business Partner ID for User-ID

( linked by the same name)

-  Object type: BUS1006 (Business Partner)

-  Used for authentication

-  Old user concept

-   No authorization checks possible

-   Needs anonymous (SU01) user for connections

-   No SSO possible

Page 77: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 77/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-20

  SU01 user:

-  SU01-user as Internet user

-  B2B since release 2.0

-  B2C since release 4.0

-  Transaction SU01 (SAP user administration)

-  Authorization checks possible (roles (B2B), reference user (B2C)

-  Internet user from user type DIALOG

-  Anonymous user from user type SERVICE

  Business Partner

  Address data, relationships to other business partners, Sales area dependent data

  Control data, Status (released, blocked, archived, special status), Partner roles, Partner functions in

transactions

Page 78: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 78/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-21

SAP AG2004

How to Create an Internet User 

SU05SU05User User  BusinessBusinessPartner Partner 

SU01SU01

User User BusinessBusiness

Partner Partner 

B2BB2B: Via transaction SU05

ID = BPnumber 

Type = BUS1006

B2C B2C : User self registration

B2BB2B:

CRM: Via transaction BP

(for existing contact person)

- select BP role Internet user 

- tab strip Internet user 

Web: Web based User Management(recommended for new contact person)

B2C B2C : User self registration

 

Internet sales standard roles:

  For anonymous user: SAP_CRM_ISA_ITSLOGIN

  For B2B internet user / B2C reference user: SAP_CRM_INTERNET_CUSTOMER

New with CRM 4.0 for B2C: Enhanced possibilities in user management (SU01 user) enabled with

migration from existing concept (SU05 user):

  In order to register or log on to a Web shop for B2C Internet Sales, you have to specify which Internet

user type is used in B2C in Customizing for Internet Sales.

Path in the IMG: Customer Relationship Management→ Internet Sales → Internet User → Internet

User Settings → Set Up Internet Users (B2C)

  Choose one of the following values for the B2C Internet user

  Change Internet user (SU05) to Internet user (SU01)

  Only Use Internet user (SU01) - recommended by SAP

  Only Use Internet user (SU05)

Page 79: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 79/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-22

  If Only Use Internet user (SU01) is checked, a CRM system user (SU01-user) will be created

automatically for each registered consumer. (BPnumber = User number). This user will refer to a

reference user, which needs to be created in advance. You need to assign the role

SAP_CRM_INTERNET_CUSTOMER to that user.

  Assignment of the reference user: Maintain a reference user variable like $INTERNETUSR in the

customizing Set Up Internet Users (B2C) and map this variable to a reference user via transaction

SU_REFUSERVARIABLE.

  The usage of SU05 Internet users is no longer recommended by SAP for the B2B shop. First you need

SU01 users for a portal integration (single-sign-on) and second future developments will build on the

SU01 functionality (like the UME Integration, which might be relevant for the B2C scenario with the

next release).

Page 80: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 80/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-23

SAP AG2004

Shop and User Management III

Shop Management

User Management

Super User Management

 

Page 81: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 81/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-24

SAP AG2004

Web Shop Manager Web Shop Manager 

Normal Shop User 

(Contact Person)

Normal Shop User 

(Contact Person)

Additional Superuser Additional Superuser 

Superuser Concept: Overview

Superuser Superuser 

Customer

ustomer

-side

ide

 

r

e

 

tes

 re tes

 

r

e

 

t

e

s

 re tes

 

  As of CRM Release 3.1, a superuser on the customer side can create and maintain Internet users using

the Web-based interface in the user management.  Flow:

  The Web shop manager (seller-side) maintains the superuser's data

  The initial password is automatically sent to the e-mail address maintained

  The superuser can log on to the user administration and create master records either for normal shop

users or for additional superusers

  The initial password is automatically sent to the user

  Web shop Manager

  Normal user of web shop provider

  No business partner for user necessary

  Role: SAP_CRM_ISA_WEBSHOP_MANAGER  Administration of existing Internet users

  Superuser

  Company superuser

  Contact partner with contact relation to companies

  Role: SAP_CRM_ISA_UA_SUPERUSER

  Creation of superusers and internet users for the related companies only

  Can only assign roles which are assigned to himself

Page 82: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 82/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-25

SAP AG2004

Super User Concept: Benefits

Cost reduction

Possibility to relocate the effort to create and administrate

Internet Sales users from the Web shop administrator on

the seller side to special users (superusers) on the customer

side

Self service

Multi level superuser concept enables a professional user

administration on customer side

Faster and better access control to the Web shop

 

Page 83: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 83/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-26

SAP AG2004

Shop Management: Unit Summary

You are now able to:

Set up a Web shop via a Web application

Customize the Web shop according to your specific needs

Customize the relevant user-settings for a B2B and B2C Shop

Log on to a B2B Web shop with your own user account

 

Page 84: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 84/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-27

Exercises

Unit: Shop and User Management

Topic: Shop Management

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:

•  Describe the idea of a WebShop

•  Create a new B2C and B2B WebShop

WebShop Management

1 Create a B2C WebShop for the additional exercises. 

1-1 To access the WebShop admin application, open the following URL:

http://<webserver:50000>/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80 X  

X=last digit of your client (for example, “0” if the CRM client is “800”)

1-2 Log on with your CRM user name.

1-3 Choose scenario Internet Sales B2C  and select the New Shop button.

1-4 Save your entries.

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

WebShop ID ZB2CSHOP##

 Description B2C WebShop for gr. ##

Country group US

Catalog PCSHOP

Variant VAR_EN

Transaction type ZIS

Page 85: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 85/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-28

2 Create a B2B WebShop for the additional exercises.

2-1 To access the WebShop admin application, open the following URL:

http://<webserver:port>/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80

X=last digit of your client (for example, “0” if the CRM client is “800”)

2-2 Log on with your CRM user.

2-3 Choose the Internet Sales B2B and select the New Shop button.

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

WebShop ID ZB2BSHOP##

 Description B2B WebShop for gr. ##

 Partner Function Contact Person 00000015Country group US

Catalog PCSHOP

Variant VAR_EN

Transaction type ZIS

2-4 Save your entries.

3 Access your B2C and B2B shop using the following URLs and check if your shop appearsin the shop list.

B2B:<http://<Webserver:port>/b2b/b2b/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80 X &language=en>

B2C:<http://<Webserver:port>/b2c/b2c/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80 X &language=en>

X=last digit of your client (for example, “0” if the CRM client is “800”)

Page 86: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 86/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-29

Unit: Elements of CRM

Topic: User Management 

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:

•  Explain the relationship between business partner and Internet user

•  Create a new Internet user .

In the following section, you will create a contact person for thecustomer Happy Store and then create an order for this customer in theB2B WebShop.

Business Partner in CRM: Happy Store

BP-Number: 3995

4. Creation of a Contact Person by a WebShop Manager

4-1  Start the Web-based user management application.

http://<webserver:port>/useradmin/useradmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

X=last digit of your client (for example, 0 if the CRM client is 800)

4-2  Try to log on with the user name 233 and password welcome. Why did it not work?What message appears?

 _________________________________________________________________

 _________________________________________________________________

4-3  Check if the role SAP_CRM_ISA_WEBSHOP_MANAGER is assigned to the CRMsystem user with the alias 233?

4-4  Check if this role is assigned to user with the alias 461?

4-5  Start the Web-based user management application again and log on with user name461 and password welcome.

Page 87: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 87/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-30

4-6  Create a new contact person for the customer Happy Store (BP number: 3995) usingthis Web-based user management application.

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

UserID Miller## E-mail miller##@sap.com (or one of you

choice)

Company Happy Store, BP-Number 3995

 Authorization Authorizations for Internet Customers

 Form of Address Mr.

 First Name John

 Name Miller##

Select the language English and leave the other fields empty. Select Create.

4-7 Note your user ID and password.

 ____________________________________________________

4-8 What did you just create in the CRM system?

4-9 Check if both exist in the CRM system

4-10 What role has been assigned to the user?

Leave the transaction.

4-11 Log on with your new contact person to the B2B WebShop. Start your browser andcall up the B2B scenario.

URL: http://<webserver:port>/b2b/b2b/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

Enter the user ID of the contact person (miller##) and the password.

Choose the WebShop ZB2BSHOP## and create an order with product HT-1000.

4-12 Check in the CRM System to see the sold-to-party and the contact person that areassigned to this order.

 Menu path: SAPmenu→ Sales Maintain Sales Transactions

Sold-to party: 

Contact Person: 

Page 88: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 88/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-31

5 Optional: Creation of Contact Persons by a Super User

In this exercise, you enable an employee of the customer Happy Store to create additionalcontact persons. 

5-1 Start the Web-based User Management application

http://<webserver:port>/useradmin/useradmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

X=last digit of your client (for example, 0 if the CRM client is 800) 

5-2 Log on with user name 461 and the password: welcome.

5-3 Create new superuser for the customer Happy Store (BP number: 3995 ) using theWeb-based User Management application.

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

UserID Superuser## E-mail Jane.Smith##@sap.com (or one of you choice)

Company Happy Store, BP-Number 3995

 Authorizations Internet Sales User Administration

Authorizations for Internet Customers

 Form of Address Mrs.

 First Name Jane

 Name Smith##

Select the language English and leave the other fields empty. Select Create.

5-4 Note your user ID and password.

 ____________________________________________________

5-5 Start the Web-based User Management application again.

http://<webserver:port>/useradmin/useradmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

5-6 Log on with the new user ID and password (Jane Smith##).

5-7 Create a new contact person as in exercise 4. What are the two differences comparedto exercise 4, when you created contact persons as a WebShop manager?

 _________________________________________________________________

 _________________________________________________________________

 _________________________________________________________________

Page 89: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 89/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-32

Page 90: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 90/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-33

Solutions

Unit: Shop and User Management

Topic: Shop Management

WebShop Management

1 Create a B2C WebShop for the additional exercises. 

1-1 To access the WebShop admin application, open the following URL:

http://<webserver:port>/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80 X  

X=last digit of your client (for example, 0 if the CRM client is 800)

1-2 Log on with your CRM user.

1-3 Choose scenario Internet Sales B2C  and select the New Shop button.

WebShop ID: ZB2CSHOP##Description: B2C WebShop for gr. ##Country group: US

Choose the Catalog  tab.

Catalog: PCSHOPVariant: VAR_EN

Choose Order  tab .

Transaction type: ZIS

1-4  Save your entries.

2 Create a B2B WebShop for the additional exercises.

2-1 To access the WebShop admin application, open the following URL:

http://<webserver:port>/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80

X=last digit of your client (for example, 0 if the CRM client is 800)

2-2 Log on with your CRM user name.

Page 91: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 91/416

© SAP AG CR800 2-34

2-3 Choose the Internet Sales B2B scenario and select the New Shop button.

WebShop ID: ZB2BSHOP##Description: B2B Web shop for gr. ##Partner Function Contact Person: 00000015Country group: US

Choose the Catalog  tab .Catalog: PCSHOPVariant: VAR_EN

Choose Order  tab .

Transaction type: ZIS

2-4 Save your entries.

3 Access your B2C and B2B shop using the following URLs and check if your shop appearsin the shop list.

B2B:<http://<Webserver:port>/b2b/b2b/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80 X &language=

en>

B2C:<http://<Webserver:port>/b2c/b2c/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80 X &language=en>

X=last digit of your client (for example, 0 if the CRM client is 800)

Page 92: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 92/416

 

© SAP AG CR800 1-1

Unit: Elements of CRM

Topic: User Management 

4. Creation of a Contact Person by a WebShop Manager

In the following section, you will create a contact person for the customer Happy Store andthen create an order for this customer in the B2B Web shop.

Business Partner in CRM: Happy Store

BP-Number: 3995

2-1  Start the Web-based user management application.

http://<webserver:port>/useradmin/useradmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

X=last digit of your client (for example, 0 if the CRM client is 800)

2-2  Try to log on with the user name 233 and password welcome. Why does it not work?What message appears?

You do not have authorization (e.g. role

SAP_CRM_ISA_WEBSHOP_MANAGER) for User Administration.

2-3  Check if the role SAP_CRM_ISA_WEBSHOP_MANAGER is assigned to the CRMsystem user with the alias 233.

Log on to the CRM and check in transaction SU01 if this role is assigned to user

with the alias 233. (Type 233 in the Alias field and choose Enter .) You will see

that the role is not assigned. Therefore, you could not log on to the User

Management.

2-4  Check if this role is assigned to user with the alias 461.

In transaction SU01, type 461 in the Alias field and choose Enter . Navigate to the

 Roles tab . You will see that this user has this role assigned and therefore, ownsthe authorizations for a WebShop manager.

2-5  Start the Web-based user management application again and log on with user name461 and the password welcome.

Page 93: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 93/416

 

© SAP AG CR800 1-2

2-6  Create a new contact person for the customer Happy Store (BP number: 3995 ) usingthis Web-based user management application.

UserID: Miller##E-mail: miller##@sap.com (or one of you choice)Company: Happy Store, BP-Number 3995

Select the Company Search button and enter the BP-Number (3995). Choose the

Go! button. Select the company by marking the check box and click on the Adopt

link  .

Authorization: Authorizations for Internet Customers 

Mark the authorization in the left menu (Not Assigned) and select the First  

 Arrow button. The selected authorization should appear in the right menu.

Form of Address: Mr. First Name: John Name: Miller##

Enter the data into the fields in the lower area of the window. Select the Continue button .

Select the language English and leave the other fields empty. Select Create.

2-7   Note your user ID and password.

 ____________________________________________________

2-8  What have you just created in the CRM system?

1.  A business partner account (role: contact person)

2.  A system user

2-9  Check if both exist in the CRM system

1.  Open the business partner master (Tx BP) and check out the relationships

of the business partner 3995 (Happy Store Los Angeles). A contact

person John Miller## has been assigned to this customer

2.  Start Tx SU01 and enter Miller## in the Alias field and select Enter . A

user with the alias Miller## has been created.

2-10 Which role has been assigned to the user?

Role: SAP_CRM_INTERNET_CUSTOMER  

Leave the transaction.

Page 94: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 94/416

 

© SAP AG CR800 1-3

2-11  Now log on with your new contact person to the B2B Web shop. Start your browserand call up the B2B scenario.

URL: http://<webserver:port>/b2b/b2b/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

Enter the user name (ID) of the contact person (miller##) and the password.

Choose the WebShop ZB2BSHOP## and create an order with product HT-1000.

2-12 Check in the CRM System the sold-to-party and the contact person that are assigned tothis order.

Menu Path: SAPmenu→  Sales →  Maintain Sales Transactions

Button: Open Business Transaction 

Enter the order number from previous exercise and select Enter .

Go to the Partner  tab page.

Sold-to party: Happy Store Los Angeles (BP#: 3995)

Contact Person: John Miller##

5 Optional: Creation of Contact Persons by a Superuser.

In this exercise, you enable an employee of the customer Happy Store to create additionalcontact persons. 

5-1  Start the Web-based user management application.

http://<webserver:port>/useradmin/useradmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

X=last digit of your client (for example, 0 if the CRM client is 800)

5-2  Log on with user name 461 and the password welcome.

5-3  Create a new superuser for the customer Happy Store (BP number: 3995 ) using theWeb-based user management application.

UserID: Superuser##E-mail: Jane.Smith##@sap.com (or one of you choice)Company: Happy Store, BP-Number 3995

Select the Company Search button and enter the BP-Number  (3995). Choose the

Go! button. Select the company by marking the check box and click on the Adopt  

link  .

Authorizations: Internet Sales User Administration

Authorizations for Internet Customers

Page 95: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 95/416

 

© SAP AG CR800 1-4

Mark the authorizations in the left menu (Not Assigned) and choose the First  

 Arrow button. The selected authorizations should appear in the right menu.

Form of Address: Mrs. First Name: Jane

 Name: Smith##Enter the data into the fields in the lower area of the window. Select the Continue 

button .

Select the English language and leave the other fields empty. Choose Create.

5-4   Note your user ID and password.

 ____________________________________________________

5-5  Start the Web based user management application again.

http://<webserver:port>/useradmin/useradmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

5-6  Log on with the new user name (ID) and password (Jane Smith##)

5-7  Create a new contact person as in exercise 2. What are the two differences comparedto exercise 2, when you created contact persons as a WebShop manager?

Only contact persons for the company Happy Store Los Angeles can be created.

The superuser can only assign those authorizations that he was assigned to.

Page 96: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 96/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-1

SAP AG2004

Catalog Setup

8. E-Servicea) Solution Search

b) Service Request Management

c) Complaints and Returns Managementin E-Commerce

9. E-Analytics

Appendix

Units

1. Foundation and Architecture

2. Shop and User Management

3. Catalog Setup

4. Order and Contract Processing

5. Price Determination and ATP

Check

6. Additional E-Selling Scenarios

7. E-Marketing

 

Page 97: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 97/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-2

SAP AG2004

Catalog Setup

Catalog Setup

Maintenance Web interface/SAPGui)

Structure

Views

List of Characteristics

Documents

Texts

Enhancements

Catalog Export

Collaborative Views

 

  With CRM 4.0 the functionality of Catalog and Order Management was extended by the following

features:

  Contract Negotiation

  RFQ Processing

  Batches

  Product Determination

  Customer specific views for external catalogs

  OCI enhancements

  Web Catalog Management

Page 98: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 98/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-3

SAP AG2004

Catalog Setup: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Set up the mySAP CRM product catalog with specific documents

(like pictures) and texts

Explain how a catalog can be activated and replicated

Specify views for individual customers or customer groups

Add additional product information (attributes from the product

master)

Display your own catalog in a Web shop

Explain the product catalog export

function

 

Page 99: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 99/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-4

SAP AG2004

Catalog Setup

Catalog Setup

Maintenance Web interface/SAPGui)

Structure

Views

List of Characteristics

Documents

Texts

Enhancements

Catalog Export

Collaborative Views

 

  Catalog enhancement with CRM 4.0

  Service product enablement

-   New material category DIEN

-  Service organization as a new field in the catalog variant

-  Service material and standard products in one catalog

  Enables combined product and service offerings, with mutual cross- and up-selling.

Page 100: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 100/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-5

SAP AG2004

Web Catalog Management

Create and manage catalogs via Web UI

Full access for catalog administrator 

Same functionality as online transaction in CRM

Create, Copy, Change, Delete

 

  Same functionality as online transaction in CRM:

  Initial and Update Replication

  Export profile and XML Export

  JSP frontend

  New User Interface follows the People-Centric UI approach

Page 101: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 101/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-6

SAP AG2004

Catalog Maintenance in SAP GUI

 

  Same functionality as in Web Catalog Management

  Product Catalog maintenance/creation (transaction: COMM_PCAT_ADM)

  Additional features:

  Copy from another catalog:

-  If a different catalog is to be copied into an existing catalog, navigate via the menu ( Edit then Copy 

from another catalog) in product catalog management. Individual catalog areas can also be selected

in this way.

  Transfer product hierarchy:

This process enables you to transfer existing product hierarchy areas, items, attributes, and

documents into your product catalog. This makes it easier for you to have a standardized

characterization of your products and their presentation in the Web shop.

Page 102: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 102/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-7

SAP AG2004

Set Up and Distribution of Product Catalog

The product catalog is maintained via web based Catalog Management

and stored in the CRM system. After creation it is replicated to the

Index server. Multimedia objects are published to the Web server.

Web

Server 

J2EE AS

CRM System

IndexIndex

Server Server 

Publishing

ReplicationProduct

Catalog

Web Server 

Web Catalog

Admin

 

  Product catalogs are used to present products in the Web (Web shop).

  The product catalog of mySAP CRM E-Commerce is maintained in the SAP CRM system or via web based Catalog Management and after that replicated to an Index server for fast access. For the same

reason, multi-media objects are published to the Web server. The index server enables to access the

catalog data quickly and to search and browse through the product catalog efficiently without accessing

the SAP CRM system. The index server is accessed directly from the J2EE Application Server.

  The product catalog is based on the CRM product master. In general, the material master data is

maintained in the SAP R/3 system and then transferred to the product master in the CRM system. In the

CRM system, the product master data is used to create one or more product catalogs for one or more

Web shops.

Replication to the Index Server:

  The product catalog is replicated to the index server (structure, texts, and so on). Since an index is

created on the index server, you can search through and select products in the product catalog quicklyand efficiently without having to access the SAP CRM system. The index can be updated on the index

server at any time. The index is the database (file structure) of the product catalog in the Web.

  All necessary settings for replication are done in transaction SRMO.

Publication to the Web Server:

  A catalog usually contains binary data such as images, sound files and other MIME objects. Since the

IMS cannot process binary data, the MIME documents are replicated to a special directory on the Web

server. For the replication and publication processes, you must define HTTP and FTP settings.

Page 103: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 103/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-8

SAP AG2004

CRM System / Web Catalog Admin

Product Catalog: General Structure

Basic Data

Administration Data

Product Catalog

PCSHOP

Computer 

Printer 

Variants

Header 

Views

Catalog Structure

Catalog Area

 

  A product catalog in the CRM system consists of seven basic elements:

1. Catalog header2. Catalog areas (structure of the catalog)

3. Variants

4. Views

5. Catalog Areas

6. Item List within a Catalog Area

7. Item Details

  The catalog header  contains a particular catalog type and additional data that applies to the entire

 product catalog (validity period, basic characteristic list, date of creation, last changes, and so on). The

characteristics list at this level is valid for all the products in the product catalog. It is used for general

characterization and in the Web catalog.

  Catalog areas enable a product catalog to be structured and organized to suit the company's

requirements. The areas are arranged hierarchically and are unlimited in number.

  Different versions of a product catalog can be defined with catalog variants. A variant is always based

on the same dataset, but can be defined for different languages, currencies, price controls, or

distribution chains (sales organization and distribution channel). If several catalog variants are defined,

the same dataset is used to create catalogs in several languages and/or with different pricing, for

example. Catalog views define the catalog areas/individual products that are displayed for a

customer/target group in the B2B Web shop.

Page 104: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 104/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-9

SAP AG2004

Catalog Type

Type of product assignment

The usage of the catalog

Possible product types

Text determination

Document on area and item

level

Usage and format of product

order number 

Type of product assignment

The usage of the catalog

Possible product types

Text determination

Document on area and item

level

Usage and format of product

order number 

The catalog type defines:

  Each catalog header contains a particular catalog type.

  Definition of catalog types in Customizing: Path (IMG): CRM Master Data  Product Catalog  

Define Catalog Types

  The catalog type determines the type of product assignment.

  Automatic assignment: The products are transferred automatically to the catalog areas. This is done by

the assignment of a product category to a catalog area. The actual maintenance to the catalog item is

shifted to the product master.

  Both manual and automatic product assignment can be used in a catalog, as long as the corresponding

catalog type was chosen. In a specific catalog area products can either be assigned manually or

automatically.

  The catalog type also controls the text determination procedure for catalog areas and items and whichdocuments are transferred from the product master and which document types can be maintained within

the product catalog (the latter only for catalog areas with manual product assignment).

  Once assigned, the catalog type of a catalog cannot be changed.

Page 105: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 105/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-10

SAP AG2004

Catalog Type: Manual and/or Automatic Assignment

Manual Item Assignment

Each product has to be assigned manually to a product catalog area

Automatic Item Assignment

The selected product category determines which product appears in

the catalog

Very flexible (all product data can be maintained

within the product catalog), much work to do

Less flexible (product data is retrieved from the

product master), fast catalog set up

 

  Manual Item Assignment:

  Product descriptions (texts, documents, attributes) can be changed and added on product catalog level

  Active and inactive versions (work versions) for product items can be kept in product catalog sub-

area

  Accessories have to be chosen manually from the product master

  Automatic Item Assignment:

  No catalog-specific attributes can be used (only from product master)

  No catalog-specific texts and documents on product catalog level (only from product master)

  No product items can be added or removed manually

  Products appear automatically with latest information from product master

  Accessories are taken automatically from the product master

Page 106: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 106/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-11

SAP AG2004

Variants

Objective

To use one catalog (with the same dataset) for several languages,

currencies, pricing models, and distribution chains

Language

Specifies the language of the

 product data

Currency, Currency 2

Specifies the primary and secondary

currency 

Sales organization

Organizational unit – is used as a

default value to generate a salesorder created in the Web shop

Responsible Org.Unit

Is used for partner determination

within created orders

Distribution channel

Organizational unit – is used as a default

value to create a sales order 

Pricing procedure

Is used to determine prices in the Web shop

Unit of measure type

Specifies the unit of measure type for the

 products in the Web shop

(base unit of measure, sales unit, forexample)

Service organization  optional)

To combine service material and standard

 products in one catalog 

Required settings for each variant (selection):

 

  You can define different versions for each catalog using the catalog variants. You can create catalogs

with the same dataset in various languages, currencies, or distribution chains by defining differentcatalog variants.

  In addition to the required entries above, the following optional settings can be maintained for each

variant:

  Valid from – valid to

 Period in which the variant is valid

  Customer group, value group, price list type

Optional entry fields for pricing, which are transferred to the IPC

  Service Organization

•New material category DIEN•Service organization as a new field in the catalog variant

•Service material and standard products in one catalog

•Enables combined product and service offerings, with mutual cross- and up-selling

Page 107: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 107/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-12

SAP AG2004

TextsDocumentsBasic Data

Catalog Areas

Catalog Areas

Language-

dependent texts

Load and save

local files

Document ID

Document type

Description

Language

Catalog area type

Area characteristic

list

Active symbol for

catalog area

PCSHOP

Printer 

Computer 

 

  Catalog areas enable a product catalog to be structured and organized to suit the company's

requirements. They are arranged hierarchically and are unlimited in number.

  On the right the data can be entered. There are three tabs. To be able to change the data the areas have

to be inactive. This can be achieved either by deactivating the area or by creating a work version. If the

area is deactivated and the catalog is saved, then the replication/export will no longer use this area (and

their sub areas as well even when they are active). A replication would then delete the areas from the

index and the web shop could no longer access them. A working version keeps the latest active version

for this purpose and the changing is done on a copy.

Basic Data:

  Here the area can be switched from active to inactive and vice versa by clicking on the bulb. The work

version is created by clicking on the button next to the bulb.

  The characteristics list concept is described in detail later.

  The catalog area can only be published on the index server if the catalog and catalog areas are active.

Documents:

  You can assign documents, such as images, to the catalog areas. These documents are then displayed in

the Web catalog when the catalog area is accessed.

Texts:

  These texts are only published on the index server if the respective variant is published with the valid

languages.

Page 108: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 108/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-13

SAP AG2004

Catalog Items

Item List

Items

o Product number 

o Product description

o  Active symbol for product

o  Administration data (created, changed, and so on)

o  Accessories

  An item list is assigned to each catalog area (manually or automatically, depending on the catalog type

and the checkbox in the catalog area).

  The item list shows all the products that are assigned to a catalog area. The product number, product

type, and product description are also displayed. The characteristics that were defined in the catalog

header and area are displayed at this level. These characteristics can be maintained if they are assigned

to the item list manually.

  The products in the item list must be activated (manual assignment) if they are to be published. In

addition to the product catalog, the catalog variant and the catalog have to be activated.

  The item list can be exported to a local file; different formats are supported (HTML, simple text, and so

on) (only within the CRM-System).

  The dropdown box For Variant  can be used to filter the item list for a certain variant (sales line).

Page 109: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 109/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-14

SAP AG2004

Item Details

Item Details

Documents and texts for items

o Integration of different documents

o Language-dependent documents

o Language-dependent texts

Language-dependent texts

Description Language

Computer  English

Product documents Item documents Texts

 

  Multimedia objects, such as images, video/sound files, or texts, can be assigned to each product. After

replication, these documents are displayed with the corresponding products in the Web catalog.

  Because the user logs on in a particular language, the system is then able to display to the user the texts

and multimedia objects defined in that language. Otherwise, the language-independent texts and/or

multimedia documents are shown. This makes the job of deploying a multi-language Web shop much

easier.

  Each document is saved under a document ID and classified according to the document type

(thumbnail, video, and so on).

  Languages: In addition to the item description, the following objects of the catalog can be language

specific:

  The name of the product catalog

  The description of the catalog areas

  The description of the catalog variants

  The multimedia objects

  The description of the catalog views

Page 110: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 110/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-15

SAP AG2004

Activation for publication

Deactivate to exclude from publication

Four activation levels:

Catalog header 

Catalog variant

Catalog area

Product item

Activation/Deactivation

Required to release the product catalog

(and new or changed catalog contents)

 

  Activate/deactivate: With this function, you can release product catalogs or catalog contents (new and

changed) for publication in a Web shop or you can deactivate these publications.

  The publication entails four activation levels:

  Product items: Releasing product items for publication

  Catalog area: Releasing a catalog area with all its subareas for publication

  Catalog variant: Releasing a catalog variant with all its active subareas for publication

  Catalog header: Releasing a product catalog for publication

Page 111: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 111/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-16

SAP AG2004

1. A view represents a product catalog filter 

2. Views can be used when catalogs are displayed in the

Web shop or for the XML export

3. Views can be assigned to business partners or target groups

Catalog Views

Catalog views define the areas/individual products

(B2B shop: customer specific) that are displayed for customers in the

Web shop or that are exported via XML

 

  View maintenance is pretty simple. Create a view by entering an ID and a description and then choose

the magnifier and select the areas and items you want to include in the view. Items are only selectable ifthe area is of type manual assignment.

  Views and variants are different types of filters for catalog contents:

  Catalog View:

-  Mainly works as a filter

-  Optional

  Catalog Variant:

-  Is more than just a filter; the parameters required for the replication (such as language, sales

organization, currency, and so on) are also defined

-  Is a prerequisite for every catalog

Page 112: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 112/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-17

SAP AG2004

Create Views

Views are created in product catalog maintenance

 

  In the details view of a defined catalog view, you can select the products or product catalog areas that

are to be included in the view.

  You can choose the individual business partners or target groups for which the view will apply by

choosing Assign business partner .

  The catalog view must be included in the definition of the Web shop. There are two options. If the view

is to apply for all (!) visitors to the Web shop, it is entered in the Catalog view field. This setting is then

also valid for the B2C scenario. If the view is not to apply for all visitors, the Catalog determination 

field is checked. The system then checks whether a view is assigned to the Web shop user, in other

words, to the B2B contact person who is currently logged on. If no view is assigned to this user, the

same tests are performed for the sold-to party for whom the contact person is responsible. The catalog

determination function only works in the B2B scenario.

  For each catalog view, a partner/product range (PPR) is generated in the background. A PPR is used tosell a particular range of products to a selected group of business partners (or target groups) within a

specified interval.

Page 113: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 113/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-18

SAP AG2004

Process of Catalog Determination

Contact person logs on

His/her sold-to-party is determined

System searches for catalog views assigned to the contact person; if not

successful it searches for view assigned to the sold-to-party (also over 

target groups)

Catalog view⇒ product catalog⇒ catalog variant

with matching sales area

List of catalog variants to choose from, similar to shop list in standard

scenario

The user will only see areas and items contained in both the variant

selected and the view determined by the system

 

Page 114: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 114/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-19

SAP AG2004

Product Hierarchy Catalog Structure

Level 1 Level 1

Level 2 Level 2

Level 3 Level 3

Level 4 Level 4

.......... ..........

Set Up a Catalog Structure from a Hierarchy

A catalog structure can be set up by means of 

a product hierarchy

 

  To set up a catalog structure from a product hierarchy, you choose Edit  and Transfer  product hierarchy

from the menu in the catalog processing transaction. This means that the catalog structure is proposedfrom the structure of the product hierarchy. All the products assigned to the hierarchy (on the Basic

Data tab of the product master) are automatically drawn into the appropriate catalog areas using their

assignment to the product categories within the hierarchy.

  There are two prerequisites here:

  A variant must be defined for the catalog in advance.

  The products must be maintained for the distribution line defined in the catalog variant.

  To create a new catalog and to save time entire catalogs or individual catalog areas can be also be

copied (either directly or in a scheduled job if you have big catalog). Thus a new catalog can easily be

compiled from existing catalogs/catalog areas.

  If a (source) catalog is to be copied as a whole, use Copy in the main Web screen for product catalog

management. In this case, the new catalog must not yet be defined.

  Please note: If you copy from a product catalog of the type manual product assignment or both, you

can choose for the type of your new catalog only between manual product assignment or both. If your

source catalog is of the type automatic product assignment you can also choose manual product

assignment as the type for your new catalog.

Page 115: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 115/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-20

SAP AG2004

Adding Product Attributes to the Catalog

List of Catalog

Characteristics

Attribute

(product master)

catalog header catalog area

Set Up

Use

Set Type

(product master)

standard

characteristic

standard

characteristicmaster characteristic(refers to field in product

master)

master characteristic(refers to field in product

master)

 

  A catalog item characteristic (e.g., color, size, and weight) is used to describe products in product

catalogs. Catalog item characteristics are assigned to catalog characteristics list, which in turn isassigned to a catalog header or to a catalog area. In a Web catalog, you can use catalog item

characteristics to search for a specific product.

  There are two types of catalog item characteristics:

  Standard characteristic: The catalog item characteristic defines a product characteristic that is only

relevant within the product catalog. The value (e.g., green) of this characteristic (e.g., color) needs to

 be assigned within each catalog.

  Master characteristic: The catalog item characteristic refers to a field in the product master set type.

This means that the characteristic values are determined from the corresponding field in the product

master record. They cannot be changed in product catalog maintenance.

  List of Catalog Characteristics (LOCs) are also used to filter products.

Page 116: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 116/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-21

SAP AG2004

Replication of Product Catalog

Input Parameters

Run Parameters

- Product Catalog

- Variant

- Search Server Relation

- Publishing Computer ID

- Package Size for Indexing

- Overwrite Existing Indexes

(only in SAP GUI)

- start/end date and time

The relevant product catalog data has to be activated

before the initial replication is started.

Initial or Update Replication of Product Catalog

Initial Replication ParametersInitial Replication Parameters

 

  In order to be viewed in a Web shop, catalogs (actually catalog variants) must be replicated..

Replication is the sending of data to TREX, which builds or updates indices that contain area, productand attribute information. Documents are published to the Web server (via ftp or http).

Initial Replication (Tx COMM_PCAT_IMS_INIT):

  Performance is considerably improved if the replication runs as a background job (F9) in transaction

COMM_PCAT_IMS_INIT.

  Replication without publication is possible, but not publication without replication.

  Overwrite existing indexes should be used with care, because it deletes all the old indexes and re-

configures the index server.

  If you have a large product catalog in a productive system, the replication process can take several

hours. The Web shop must be closed during this time (only available in SAP GUI).  Via Web Catalog Management, replication can be scheduled.

Update Replication (Tx COMM_PCAT_IMS_UPDA):

  An update replication can be performed at any time after the initial replication.

Page 117: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 117/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-22

  When catalog data is changed, the system recognizes this by using ALE change pointers to the modified

fields. This means that only the data which has been changed is transported.

  In report COM_PCAT_IMSD_CP_SHOW you can see all changes, which are taken into account by the

update replication.

Single Replication (Tx COMM_PCAT_IMS_SINGLE)

  Changes specific catalog data based on user input on selection screen.

  Creates/updates S-Index (es).

Page 118: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 118/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-23

SAP AG2004

Indices after Replication (on TREX)

S

S

 A PS

S

S

Exist both per product

catalog variant

S-indices exist only for LOCs

associated with areas

Replication of a product catalog results in:

One A-index containing hierarchical structure information of the

catalog areas (and descriptive text)

One P-index containing standard and basic list of characteristics of

the catalog items

Probably a set of S-indices, each containing an additional list of

characteristics (LOC) for the items of the associated area

 

  Indices are a data source for the representation of the product catalog and search functionality in CRM

E-Commerce application and are stored on the TREX.

  S-indices: A LOC may be assigned to a catalog area supporting an additional set of attributes for the

products in this area.

  imsAdmin: Tool for interactively searching in TREX index: You access this Web application via the

URL: http://<webserver:port>/imsadmin/ui/init.do.

  Replication logs are found in transaction SLG1.

Page 119: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 119/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-24

SAP AG2004

Documents (e.g., images) can be displayed in the Web shop for 

Products

Catalog areas

Best sellers

...

Assignment of Documents

result

Use of the Business Document Service (BDS)

Standard document types are supported by the Web shop JSPs

out of the box

 

  Documents (e.g., pictures) can be assigned to the specific products or catalog areas in the product

catalog. These documents are then displayed in the Web shop, together with the corresponding productor catalog area.

  You assign document types in the product catalog; for catalog areas under the area header section, for

 products under the catalog item detail section.

Page 120: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 120/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-25

SAP AG2004

Document Types in the Catalog

   E  x

  a  m  p   l  e  o   f  a  c  a   t  a   l  o  g  p  a  g  e

Notebooks

More comfort means better time utilization

Think about your mobile equipment, your

activities around the world

Product list

“Protecting your laptop from damage" (PDF)1)

Document

3D area screen as O2C

PDF document (area)

Document type

ECO_O2C

ECO_PDFA

Document

PDF document (item)

Document type

ECO_PDFI

Within other catalog areas you will find other 

useful accessories.

Notebooks

are built in

europe and

have the most

exciting

features.

Documents on area level

Documents on item level

 

  You maintain the document types that can be assigned to a catalog area and/or item in the Customizing

(see CRM IMG: Web Application Server SAP Web Application Server  Basis Services  ArchiveLink Basic Customizing  Edit Document Type).

  Note that the Web shop templates must be adapted to visualize new documents within the Web shop.

  The language controls the publication of documents in catalog variants. If language independent is

selected, the document is valid for all the languages defined in the catalog variants.

  Each document is saved under a document ID and classified according to the document type

(thumbnail, video, and so on).

Page 121: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 121/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-26

SAP AG2004

Document Types in the Catalog – Configuration

5. Maintain texts for products, items or areas

6. Replicate and publish catalog

1. Document Class

2. Document Type

3. Templates for Folders

4. Catalog Type

Configuration Steps:

   C  u  s   t  o  m   i  z   i  n  g

Document

PDF document (item)

Document Type

ECO_PDFI

Document

3D area screen as O2C

PDF document (area)

Document Type

ECO_O2C

ECO_PDFA

7. Change JSP User Interface

 

  Define document class: SPRO  SAP Web Application Server SAP Web Application Server  

Basis Services  ArchiveLink  Basic Customizing  Edit Document Classes

  Define document type: SPRO: SAP Web Application Server SAP Web Application Server Basis

Services ArchiveLink  Basic Customizing  Edit Document Type

  Define templates for folders: SPRO: CRM  Basic Functions  Content Management  Define

Templates for Folders

  Maintain catalog types: SPRO: CRM  Master Data  Product Catalog  Define Catalog Types

Page 122: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 122/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-27

SAP AG2004

Text Determination in the Catalog

   E  x

  a  m  p   l  e  o   f  a  c  a   t  a   l  o  g  p  a  g  e

Notebooks

More comfort means better time utilization

Think about your mobile equipment, your

activities around the world

Product list

Protecting your laptop from damage (PDF)1)

Text

Area headline

Area description

Text type

Z001

Z002

Text

Item description

Text type

Z005

Within other catalog areas you will find other 

useful accessories.

Notebooks

are built in

Europe and

have the most

exciting

features.

Text on area level

Text on item level

1) PDF: portable document format

Side text

Footer 

Z003

Z004

 

  The product catalog in the CRM system enables you to load and save text files in a local file system.

This allows existing text documents (description of catalog areas) to be reused.

  These texts are only published on the index server if the respective variant is published with the valid

languages.

  Catalog Area:

  According to the Customizing settings for the catalog type, one or more texts can be entered in

different languages.

  Customizing path is CRM  Basic Functions  Text Management  Define Text Objects and Text

Types. The text object used is PCAT_CTY and the text IDs are 0001 0002 and 0003 but they are

changeable.

  Customizing path is CRM Basic Functions Text Management  Define Text DeterminationProcedure. Choose PCAT_CTY and the det. Procedures can be entered that are used in the catalog.

Page 123: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 123/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-28

SAP AG2004

Text Determination in the Catalog – Configuration

5. Maintain texts for products, items or areas

6. Replicate catalog

1. TextID for PCAT_CTY/PCAT_ITM

2. Text Type

3. Text det. procedure

4. Catalog Type

Configuration Steps:

   C  u  s   t  o  m   i  z   i  n  g

Text

Item description

Text Type

Z005

Text

Area headline

Area description

Text Type

Z001

Z002

7. Change JSP User Interface

Side text

Footer 

Z003

Z004

Templates

 

  TextID and text types:

IMG activity: Define Text Objects and Text Types

  Text determination procedure:

IMG activity: Define Text Determination Procedure

Page 124: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 124/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-29

SAP AG2004

Business Add-Ins for the Product Catalog

BAdIsBAdIs

Create Customer Specific Attributes for Replication

PRODCAT_LOC_UPDATE (provides information

on all the changes made to the list of catalog

characteristics and catalog item characteristics of

product catalogs)

Create/change Catalog Characteristics List and Catalog Item

PCAT_IMS_FEED_ATT (you can create individual attributes on the Index

server at the time of initial replication)

PCAT_IMS_FEED_VAL (you can assign values to attributes during both

initial and change replication)

Customer Specific Evaluation of Attributes for Replication

Customer Specific Adjustment of Price Relevant Data

PCAT_CNDPRICE (you can change price control data at the time of list

price determination)

 

  For further information on these Business Add-Ins see SAP IMG  CRM Master Data  Product

Catalog Business Add-Ins for Product Catalog.

  PCAT_IMS_FEED_ATT: Called when index is created (A- and P-Index).

  PCAT_IMS_FEED_VAL: Called for each area and item during replication.

  The definition of a Business Add-In can be displayed in transaction SE18.

  For implementing a Business Add-In the transaction SE19 has to be used.

  Do not forget to activate the BAdI after implementing.

  Further useful BAdIs: 

  Changes in the Catalog itself (called after Catalog is saved)

-  BADI: PRODCAT_UPDATE

-  Implementation: PRODCAT_UPDATE_IMS

PRODCAT_UPDATE_CVIEWS

Page 125: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 125/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-30

  Changes in Product Master Data (called after product is saved)

-  BADI: PRODUCT_UPDATE2

-  Implementation: PRODUCT_UPDATE2_PCAT

-  Since CRM 4.0

-  BADI: COM_PROD_MNT_UPD

-  Implementation: COM_PROD_MNT_PCAT

  Changes in Interlinkages (accessories - called when Interlinkage is saved)

-  BADI: INTERLINKAGE_UPDATE

-  Implementation: INTERLINK_UPD_PCAT

Page 126: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 126/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-31

SAP AG2004

XML Export of Product Catalog

Catalog Data

Business Partner 

Connection Parameters

Export ParametersProduct catalog

Catalog variant

Version (active, inactive)

Business partner number 

(used for individual pricing)

Use SAP Business

Connector 

or download files

(output parameters)

CRM

ProductProductCatalogCatalog

XML

To marketplaces

Or printed catalogs

To marketplaces

Or printed catalogs

 

  The xml export function is used to export a catalog variant of a product catalog to a business partner.

See transaction COMM_PCAT_EXPORT and COMM_PCAT_PROFILE.

  A business partner is needed as in general, with each business partner a certain format and transport

mode is arranged.

  An update of the catalog is possible, as after each successful export the date and time of this export is

stored in the profile

Export profile:

  Prior the catalog export you need to create a export profile (Tx: COMM_PCAT_PROFILE).

  The format of the product key with the XML can either be product ID or product order number.

  The multimedia profile defines the handling of attachments and is defined in the customizing.

Page 127: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 127/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-32

  Selection of the transport mode:

  Use Business connector

-  The RFC Destination to the business connector that should be connected and the mapping format

can be entered. Mappings must be programmed in the business connector package. The goal part

defines where the result is stored. File system is relative to the server where the business connectoris installed. Http Service and Routing rule are managed in the business connector. For more

information please read the documentation there.

  File download

-  Two different behaviors (if note 659013 is implemented) . If the export runs as a dialog job the

 path is relative to the presentation server. As batch job the path is relative to the application server.

Page 128: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 128/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-33

SAP AG2004

Implemented XML formats

X: xCBL

W: PDA (special format for mobile clients)

A: new SAP XML (CRM 3.0 and above)

Other: old SAP-XML

BAdI‘s for XML Export

PCAT_XML_ADD_ATTR (additional product attributes)

PCAT_XML_FORMAT (determination of the Class for XML generation)

XML Export: Formats and Enhancements

For conversion into other XML formats SAP XI or SAP Business

Connector can be used

 

  BADI: PCAT_XML_FORMAT (Select Format for XML Export)

  Called before the XML Export starts.

  BADI: PCAT_XML_ADD_ATTR  (Additional Attributes)

  Method DEFINE_ATTRIBUTES is called during area processing and adds new attributes on area

level.

  Method GET_ATTRIBUTE_VALUES is called during item processing and adds new attributes and

their values on item level.

  Called when exporting the area and exporting an item.

Page 129: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 129/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-34

SAP AG2004

 You can decide whether the file created for the XML export should

contain product order numbers or the product ID

Product Order Number 

CRM

ProductProduct

catalogcatalog

withwith

ProductProduct

Catalog IDCatalog ID

WS09WS09

Product order numbers are only relevant for

export for the catalog (not for the shop)

XML ExportXML Export

 

  You can determine whether the catalog ID is placed at the beginning or the end of the product order

number.

  Global Customizing of the product order number cannot be changed, while there are catalog types (in

existing clients), which are using the product order number assignment.

  Product order numbers are not saved in the database.

  BAdIs for enhancing the functionality:

  PON_ENCODE

  PON_DECODE

  Global Settings for Product Order Numbers:

  IMG Path: CRM

 Master Data

 Product Catalog

 Global Settings for Product Order Numbers

Page 130: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 130/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-35

SAP AG2004

External Catalog Integration: Overview

SAP CRM

ProductProduct

catalogcatalog

ExternalExternal

productproductcatalogcatalog

3rd party spare parts catalogs

B2B Web shop

 

  Within the Web shop an external catalog can be used. Catalogs like Enigma or Docware contain a lot

of additional information about products. The customer calls the external catalog via a link, chooses the products, and then transfers these products to the Web shop basket.

  Prerequisites

  The Web shop application B2B has been deployed. For the B2C Web shop, the external catalog

integration is available on a project basis.

  The XCM application configuration (old: scenario) that has been created with the help of the XCM

 Administration Tool needs to be based on one of the following configurations delivered by SAP:

-   b2bWithPortal

-   b2bWithUME

-   b2bCRMstandard

  Additionally, the configuration needs to have the value javabasket for the parameter basketdata.

  The products of the external catalog must be maintained in the CRM product master.

  No support of configurable products.

  Open Catalog Interface (OCI) version 3.5 is used.

  The OCI describes how to pack these items’ attributes in a HTML-formatted request or in an XML-

 based document that can be sent via an HTTP-Request.

Page 131: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 131/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-36

SAP AG2004

External Catalog Integration: Customizing

Settings in XCM

Dummy Catalog

Settings in Shop Management

 

Shop Management:

  An CRM catalog is needed for the following header information: Sales organization, distributionchannel, and language. With CRM 4.0 SP05 the CRM Web shop can be build up with just the external

catalog. An internal catalog is needed for the organizational data and needs not to be replicated.

  Extended Configuration Management (XCM)

  Since CRM 4.0 all OCI parameters moved from Web.xml to the XCM.

XCM parameters:

  ociReadAllProductData: All basket relevant information’s reading from OCI. If true:

1. The ProductIdVendorAssigned  field is taken into account, if this is empty the ProductID field.

2. The external catalog has to provide the CRM product number in this field (product ID needs to

exist in CRM).

3. The price, currency, price unit, and product description will be transferred from the external

catalog (additionally to quantity, product ID and unit of measurement). A prerequisite for that

is that the parameter ociForm is set to XML and the OCI Version 3.5 is used.

  ociAllProductsInMaterialMaster: All products are known in the backend (needs to be true for CRM

E-Commerce).

  forceIPCPricing (javabasket): True = prices will be recalculated by IPC. If is not set to true, the

customer will first see the transferred price but after the order simulation the CRM specific price.

  isInternalCatalogAvailable: Do we read any information from the internal catalog? The default value

is true, as we need the header data from the CRM catalog (true fast order entry is enabled).

Page 132: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 132/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-37

SAP AG2004

External Catalog Integration: OCI Test Application

Material number is filled in field

ProductIDVendorAssigned 

B2B Web shop

 

  The following attributes are relevant for the basket: (new = new with CRM 4.0)

  Product I (old)

  Quantity (old)

  Unit of measure (old)

  Product description (new)

  Gross price (new)

  Net price (new)

  Currency (new)

Userexits:

  Change catalog URL:

The customer should see a catalog that shows only products relevant for him or her (customer specific

views on external catalogs). The external catalog handles this by individual URLs for each user.

 User Exit in isa.isacore.action.oci.OciGetCatalogURLAction

  Modify item list (retrieval of further data from the external catalog).

Add additional fields to the item list.

 User Exits in isa.isacore.action.OciReceiveAction

Page 133: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 133/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-38

SAP AG2004

Catalog Setup II

Catalog Setup

Maintenance Web interface/SAPGui)

Structure

Views

List of Characteristics

Documents

Texts

Enhancements

Catalog Export

Collaborative Views

 

Page 134: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 134/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-39

SAP AG2004

Contact Person

Employees in the same

company as the

superuser)

Contact Person

Employees in the same

company as the

superuser)

Catalog ViewsCatalog Views

Collaborative Views: Overview

Superuser

 on customer-side)

Superuser

 on customer-side)

Computers

Printers

Computers

Scanners

 

r

e

 

t

e

s

 

r

e

 

t

e

s

In

Web

Shop

In

Web

Shop

 

  Collaborative Views enable customers to change their catalog views in self-service.

  Process flow:

  The customer’s administrator (superuser), who is authorized to create catalog views for employees

(contact persons) of the company, logs on to the Web shop.

  The administrator creates new catalog views from the whole range of products in the catalog and

assigns them to employees.

  Employees log on to the Web shop and get displayed the before assigned catalog views. The search

is limited to the products, which are part of the catalog view.

  The owners of the Web shop save maintenance effort and time by having the Web shop customers take

over this task.

  Collaborative Views can be based on the views that the Web shop administrator has created (onvendor-side).

Page 135: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 135/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-40

SAP AG2004

Collaborative Views: Maintenance and Assignment

Using a Web-based interfaceUsing a Web-

based interface

View Maintenance

Assignment of

Employees

 

  Different views can be assigned by the customer administrator to multiple contact persons within his or

her company.

  The Web application Collaborative Views can be called via the following URL:

-  http://<webserver:port>/cviews/views/init.do

Page 136: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 136/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-41

SAP AG2004

Catalog Setup: Unit Summary

You are now able to:

Set up the mySAP CRM product catalog with specific documents

(like pictures) and texts

Explain how a catalog can be activated and replicated

Specify views for individual customers or customer groups

Add additional product information

(attributes from the product master)

Display your own catalog in a Web shop

Explain the product catalog export function

 

Page 137: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 137/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-42

Page 138: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 138/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-43

Exercises

Unit: Catalog Setup

Topic: Product Catalog

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:

•  Outline how a catalog is defined, activated, and replicated

•  Describe how multi-media objects can be integrated in the productcatalog

•  Explain how characteristics are defined and applied in the product

catalog 

Create a Product Catalog for Your B2C and B2B WebShop.

1-1 Create a product catalog for your B2C and B2B Web shop

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X( X stands for the last digit of your client)

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

 Product Catalog name ZCAT##

Catalog type Both

 Description Catalog for group ##

 Language English

Page 139: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 139/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-44

Variants 

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

Catalog variant VARIANT_EN_##

 Description US variant/USD Language English

Currency USD (American Dollar)

 Abbr.: Sales org.: O 50000609

 Distribution channel 30

 Division 00

The Sales organization and Distribution channel control the products that are allowedin the product catalog and determine the sales-relevant data when the order is created.

Pricing procedure: RVCXUS

Unit of measure (UoM) type: Base unit of measure 

Save your entries.

1-2 In the Main Areas tab, create a structure for your product catalog. First define a

Scanners catalog area

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

Catalog area Scanners

 Description Scanners ##

 Language English

1-3 Add the products HT-1080 and HT-1081 to your new catalog area.

1-4 Only activated items are considered during replication to the index server. For this

reason, activate all the levels of your product catalog (items, catalog areas, variants,

catalog header). Save your product catalog.

Page 140: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 140/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-45

1-5 To access the product catalog with the browser, you have to add your catalog to your

WebShop.

URL:http://<webserver:port>/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X

WebShop: ZB2CSHOP##

Replace the existing catalog with your own catalog.

Catalog: ZCAT##Variant: VARIANT_EN_##

1-6 After maintenance of the product catalog and the WebShop is complete, data has to

 be replicated to the index server.

Replicate the content of your product catalog. Remember that only the activatedelements of your product catalog will be replicated to the index server.

URL:http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X

Specify the following parameters for the replication:

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

Your product catalog ZCAT##

Your variant VARIANT_EN_##

Search server relation DRFUZZY

 Publishing computer ID Choose See possible entries button.

Choose the Initial Replication button. 

1-7 Now call up the B2C scenario.

URL: http://<webserver:port>/b2c/b2c/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X

Choose the WebShop for consumers that use your product catalog (ZB2CSHOP##).

Check whether the products you maintained in your product catalog display.

If the products do not display, you may have to activate the missing elements of your

 product catalog. Then run an update replication for your catalog variant.

Page 141: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 141/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-46

Page 142: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 142/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-47

Unit: Catalog Setup

Topic: Catalog Views 

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:

•  Create catalog views

•  Use the automatic product assigment

Catalog Views

2-1 Assign first a new catalog area printer with automatic product assignment to your

catalog ZCAT##. As a pre-condition, assign hierarchy HIER_ISA and product

category CAT_## to products THT-00-## and THT-01-##.

2-2 Create a catalog area called Printers with automatic product assignment.

URL:http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X   ( X

stands for the last digit of your client)

Header

Catalog area: PrintersMark the Automatic Assignment  checkbox.

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

 Description Printers

 Product hierarchy Hierarchy for ISA

 Product category CAT_##

Look at the products automatically added by the system.

Activate your catalog area and replicate your catalog

Page 143: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 143/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-48

2-3 Add the catalog to your B2B WebShop.

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

Log on with your CRM user.

WebShop: ZB2BSHOP##

Replace the existing catalog and variant with your catalog data:

Catalog: B2BCAT##Variant: VARIANT_EN_##

Page 144: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 144/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-49

2-4 Start your browser and call up the B2B scenario.

URL: http://<webserver:port>/b2b/b2b/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X

Call up your Web shop for business customers ( ZB2BSHOP## ).

Log on to the B2B shop. To log on, use the contact person you created in Unit 2( Miller##). 

2-4-1 Check whether the products that were assigned to the catalog areas Printersand Screens display.

2-4.2 If the products do not display, activate the missing elements of your product

catalog and run an update replication for your product catalog.

2-5 Now define a catalog view.

2-5.1 Call the Web catalog maintenance.

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X

2-5-2 Open your ZCAT##  catalog and choose the Views tab and define a new view. 

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

Catalog view View_##

 Description Catalog view for group ##

2-5-3 Select your new view and call up the details (button Manage Views). Now

select the catalog area Screens, since this will be contained in your view andall products. Save your selection.

On the previous page, select the Assign business partner  button. In the upper

screen area, search for the contact person that you created in Unit 2 and add it

to the catalog view.

Save your entries.

2-6 Mark the Catalog Search checkbox in the definition of your WebShop.

2-7 Perform an update replication for your product catalog.

URL:http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X

2-8 Log on to your B2B WebShop with your contact person and check whether the catalog

view that you have created appears.

Page 145: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 145/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-50

Page 146: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 146/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-51

(optional) 

Unit: Catalog Setup

Topic: Copying Catalog Areas 

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:

•  Create an additional product catalog by using existing catalog

areas 

Create an additional product catalog by using existing catalog

areas.

3-1 Create an additional product catalog.

URL:http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X

Variants 

Catalog variant: VARIANT_EN_##

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

 Name  ZCAT##_2

Catalog type  Both

Description Second catalog for group ##

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

Description  US variant

Language  English

Currency USD

Unit of measure type Base unit of measure

Abbr.: Sales org.: O 50000609

Distribution channel 30

Pricing procedure RVCXUS

Page 147: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 147/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-52

3-1-1 Now insert the areas and products from your first product catalog (ZCAT##).

Notice: This step is only possible in the CRM System!

Menu path within CRM: SAPmenu→ Master Data→ Product Catalog→ 

 Maintain ProductCatalog

3-1-2 Look at the catalog you have just created and modify it as necessary.

Page 148: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 148/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-53

Unit: Catalog Setup

Topic: Product Catalog/Catalog Characteristics 

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:

•  Display additional product attributes in the Web shop

Display the Designer  and Manufactured since attributes of your product THT-00-## in the WebShop.

4-1 Assign the attributes Designer and Manufactured since to your product THT-00-##

and maintain values for these two attributes.

4-1-1 Create a new set type ZDESIGN_##.

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

Set type name ZDESIGN_##.Description Design for group ##

Product type Material

Attributes ZDESIGNER

ZMANUFACT_SINCE

Save the set type.

4-1-2 Assign your settype ZDESIGN_## and the General  view to the category

CAT_##  of hierarchy Hier_ISA. 

4-1-3 Assign hierarchy HIER_ISA and product category CAT_## to product THT-

00-##. (If you have not done it before)

4-1-4 Maintain values of your choice for the two attributes.

Designer group: ______________________________________

Manufactured since: ______________________________________  

Page 149: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 149/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-54

4-2 Maintain a lists of catalog characteristics (LOC) for your product catalogsZB2CCAT## and B2BCAT##. Assign this characteristics list to a catalog area of your

 product catalog and run an update replication for your product catalog. Finally, checkwhether you can search in the WebShop on the basis of the new characteristics.

4-2-1 Create a characteristics list called ZLOC##.

URL:http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

Catalog characteristics list: ZLOC##

Description: List of catalog characteristics for group ##

Assign the following attributes to your list of characteristics:

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

 Name ZMANUFACT_SINCE  

 Description Manufactured since  Name ZDESIGNER 

 Description Designer group 

The attribute type of your entry should be Standard  and the Entry Type should

 be Simple entry field.

4-2-2 Assign your characteristics list to the Printers area of your product catalog

ZB2CCAT##.

Check whether the attributes of your characteristics list appear as entry fields

in the item list of the catalog area Printers.

4-2-3 Maintain the fields in the columns Designer for group and Manufactured sincefor all products in the area Printers Save your entries

4-2-4 Perform an update replication for your product catalog.

4-3 Now call up the B2C scenario.

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/b2c/b2c/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

Additional fields for an extended search should now be displayed. Enter a search term

and start the search.

Page 150: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 150/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-55

4-4  Maintain a list of characteristics for your product catalog ZB2BCAT##.

4-4-1 Create a characteristics list called ZLOC##02.

Catalog characteristics list: ZLOC##02

Description: List of catalog characteristics 2 ##Assign the set type :  ZDESIGN_##  

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCR M80X

Check that the attribute type of your two entries will be  Master characteristics 

and the entry type Simple. 

4-4-2 Assign your new characteristics list ZLOC##02 to the area Printers of your

 product catalog Z B2BCAT## .

4-4-3 Why do the attributes MANUFACT_SINCE and DESIGNER appear with

values as additional fields in the item list of the catalog area Printers?

4-4-4 Perform an update replication for your product catalog.

4-4-5 Now call up the B2B scenario.

http://<webserver:port>/b2b/b2b/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  Check that now the attributes MANUFACT_SINCE and DESIGNER appear for product THT-00-##

Page 151: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 151/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-56

Page 152: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 152/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-57

Unit: Catalog Setup

Topic: Product Catalog / Multi-Media Objects 

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:

•  Add images to the products in your catalog

Add images to the products in your product catalogZB2CCAT##.

5-1 On the Internet, find two small and two large images that you could assign to the

 products in your catalog. Store the selected objects on your local hard drive C: in the

temp-directory.

5-2 Add the images to your product catalog.

URL:http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X

Product catalog: ZB2CCAT##

Add a thumbnail picture and a large, detailed picture for your product THT-00-##.

Repeat this procedure for product THT-01-##.Before you can check the results in the WebShop, you have to reactivate your

 products. (Ensure that all the levels of the product catalog are active.)

5-3 Perform an update replication for your product catalog.

5-4 Start your browser and call up the B2C scenario.

URL: http://<webserver:port>/b2c/b2c/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

Check whether your products are now provided with images.

Page 153: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 153/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-58

Page 154: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 154/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-59

(optional)

Unit: Catalog Setup

Topic: Product Catalog / Document Types

At the conclusion of this exercises, you will be able to:

•  Create a new catalog type

•  Create a new document type and assign it to a catalog type

Create a Catalog Type.

6-1  Create a new catalog type by copying the existing catalog type BOTH.

Field Name or Data Type Values

Catalog type ZC##

 Description Catalog type for group ##

6-2 Look at the Assignment of document types to your new catalog type. How many

document types are assigned to the Folder-Template for areas  Both-Area?

 __________________________________________________________________

6-3 Create a document class Z##_MP3_XXX.

Menu path: Customizing→ SAP Web Application Server → SAP Web Application

Server → Basis Services → ArchiveLink→ Basic Customizing→ Document classes 

Choose the  New entries  button.

Field Name or Data Type Values

 Document class Z##_MP3_XXX (XXX = client of yourCRM system)

 Description Document class MP3 for group ##

 MIME type audio/mp3

Page 155: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 155/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-60

6-4 Create a document type called Z##_AU_XXX and assign it to the document class youcreated in the previous exercise.

Customizing→ SAP Web Application Server → SAP Web Application Server → Basis

Services → ArchiveLink → Basic Customizing→ Edit Document types

Field Name or Data Type Values

 Document type Z##_AU_XXX

 Long Name Document type MP3 for group

##

 Document class Z##_MP3_XXX

Assign your new document type to a new template for folders

Menu path: SPRO→ CRM → Basic Functions→ Content Management → Define

Templates for Folders 

Choose entry Both-Areas and copy it to Both-Area_##_XXX .

Click with the right-hand mouse button in the space under Name and choose Create Folder .

Enter Name Z##_AU_XXX and Description MP3. Go to Properties tab and maintain

value Z##_AU_XXX for the document type.

6-5 Assign your folder template to your catalog type Both_Area_##_XXX.

Customizing→ Customer Relationship Management → Master Data → Product

Catalog → Define Catalog Types 

6-6 Create a new product catalog with your catalog type ZC##.

URL:http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X

Field Name or Data Type Description or Values

 Product catalog ZTEST##

Catalog type Catalog type for group##

Catalog description Text of your choice

Page 156: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 156/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-61

6-7 Only maintain the necessary fields (name and description of your choice) at catalog

header level and create just one catalog area.

Field Name or Data Type Description or Values

Catalog area Area_1

 Description Any

6-8 Call up the header data of the catalog area you just created and search for the newdocument type.

Page 157: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 157/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-62

Page 158: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 158/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-63

(optional)

Unit: Catalog Setup

Topic: Product Catalog / Text Types

At the conclusion of this exercises, you will be able to:

•  Explain and set the basic text determination steps in Customizing

•  Extend a catalog type to include a new text type

In Customizing, look at the details for the catalog type BOTH. 

7-1 Which text determination procedures are allowed for

a)  Catalog areas?

 b)  Catalog items?

Menu path: Customizing→ Customer Relationship Management → Master Data → 

 Product Catalog→ Define Catalog Types 

7-2 Look closely at the text determination procedure S2. Which text types are allowed for

catalog areas in this procedure? _____________________________________________________________________ 

 _______________________________________________________________

Menu path: Customizing→ Customer Relationship Management → Basic Functions

→ Text Management →  Define Text Determination Procedure 

7-3 Create a new text determination procedure and extend it to include a new text type.

7-3-1 First copy the existing text determination procedure S2 and all dependententries.

Call your copy of the text determination procedure TS## and assign the Text

determination procedure for group ## description.

Field Name or Data Type Description or Values

TextDetermProc. TS##

 Dscrptn proc. Text determination group ##

Page 159: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 159/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-64

7-3-2 For the text object PCAT_CTY (=product catalog area), create a new text type

ZX## (X stands for the last digit of your client) and assign the Footer for

group ## description.

Menu path: Customizing→ Customer Relationship Management → Basic

 Functions→ Text Management → Define Text Objects and Text Types

Field Name or Data Type Values

Text ID ZX## (X stands for the last digit of yourclient)

 Description Footer for group ##

7-3-3 Assign the new text type to your text determination procedure TS##.

Menu path: Customizing→ Customer Relationship Management → Basic Functions→ Text Management → Define Text Determination Procedure 

Field Name or Data Type Values

Text type ZX## (can be chosen via F4 Help)

Sequence 0004

7-3-4 Assign the new text determination procedure to your catalog type ZC## (from

the previous exercise on document types).

Menu path: Customizing→ Customer Relationship Management → Master

 Data→ Product Catalog→ Define Catalog Types

Field Name or Data Type Values

Text Determination

 Procedure for areas

TS##

Text Determination Procedure for items

S5 (leave unchanged)

7-3-4 Check your settings by

•  Creating a product catalog with your catalog type

•  Creating a catalog area

•  Looking at the possible texts for this catalog area

Page 160: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 160/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-65

Solutions

Unit: Catalog Setup

Topic: Product Catalog

Create a Product Catalog for your B2C and B2B WebShop.

1-1 Create a product catalog.

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X( X stands for the last digit of your client)

Log on with your CRM user name.

Choose the Product Catalog  link and then the Create tab .

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

 Product Catalog name ZCAT##

Catalog type Both

 Description Catalog for group ##

 Language English

Select the Go button.

Select the Variants tab and then the Add Variant  button.

Variants 

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

Catalog variant VARIANT_EN_##

 Description US variant/USD

 Language English

Currency USD (American Dollar)

 Abbr.: Sales org.: O 50000609

 Distribution channel 30

 Division 00

The Sales organization and Distribution channel control the products that are allowed

in the product catalog and determine the sales-relevant data when the order is created.

Pricing procedure: RVCXUS

Unit of measure (UoM) type: Base unit of measure

Page 161: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 161/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-66

Save your entries.

1-2 In the Main Areas tab, create a structure for your product catalog.First define a catalog area Scanners 

Select the Main Areas tab and then the Add Area button.

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

Catalog area Scanners

 Description Scanners ##

 Language English

Select the Add Area button.

1-3 Add the products HT-1080 and HT-1081 to your new catalog area.

Select Scanners ## in the tree structure. Choose the Item Overview tab and thenthe Add Item button.

1-4 Only activated items are considered during replication to the index server. For this

reason, activate all the levels of your product catalog (items, catalog areas, variants,catalog header).

Header level: Choose ZCAT## in the tree structure. Under Header Data, select

the Activate button next to the light bulb icon. The light bulb must be lit up.

Variant level: Choose the Variants tab and select the Activate button in the

column Activator  for the variants.

Area level Printers, sub areas and products: Select the Areas tab and choose for

area Printers in the column Activator  the entry Including subareas and items . 

Select the Activate button.

Area level Scanners, sub areas and products: Select the Areas tab and choose for

area Scanners in the column Activator  the entry Including subareas and items . 

Choose the Activate button.

Save your product catalog.

Use the Save button in the upper row.

Page 162: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 162/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-67

1-5 To access the product catalog with the browser, you have to add your catalog to your

WebShop.

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

WebShop: ZB2CSHOP## 

Replace the existing catalog with your own catalog.

Catalog : ZCAT## Variant : VARIANT_EN_## 

Log on with your CRM user name. Select the Existing Shops button and search

for your WebShop ZB2CSHOP##. Choose the Change button and select the

Catalog  tab. Delete the entries PCSHOP and VAR_EN . 

Add your catalog and variant. Save your entries.

1-6 After maintenance of the product catalog and the completion of the WebShop, data

has to be replicated to the index server. Replicate the content of your product catalog.Remember that only the activated elements of your product catalog will be replicatedto the index server.

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X

Log on with your CRM user name and choose the Replication link  .

Specify the following parameters for the replication:

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

Your product catalog ZCAT##

Your variant VARIANT_EN_##

Search server relation DRFUZZY

 Publishing computer ID Choose See possible entries button.

Choose the Initial Replication button. 

1-7 Now call up the B2C scenario.

URL: http://<webserver:port>/b2c/b2c/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X

Choose the WebShop for consumers that use your product catalog (ZB2CSHOP##).

Check whether the products you maintained in your product catalog display.

If the products do not display, you may have to activate the missing elements of your

 product catalog. Then run an update replication for your catalog variant.

Page 163: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 163/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-68

Page 164: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 164/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-69

Unit: Catalog Setup

Topic: Catalog Views 

Catalog Views

2-1  First assign a new catalog area Printer with automatic product assignment to your catalog

ZCAT##. As a pre-condition, assign hierarchy HIER_ISA and product category

CAT_## to products THT-00-## and THT-01-##.

Menu path: SAPmenu → Master Data→ Products→ Maintain Products 

Maintain the following fields for product THT-00-## and THT-01-##

Category ID: CAT_##

 Hierarchy ID: Test hierarchy for group ## 

2-2  Create a catalog area called Printers with automatic product assignment.

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X( X stands for the last digit of your client)

Log on with your CRM user name and select the Product Catalog  link and log on

to your catalog ZCAT##.

Select the Main Areas tab and choose the Add Area button.

Header

Catalog area: PrintersMark the Automatic Assignment  checkbox.

 Description: Printers

Select product hierarchy and category.

 Product hierarchy: Hierarchy for ISA  Product category: CAT_## 

Select the Add Area button.

Look at the products automatically added by the system.

Select the Printers area in the structure tree and then on Item Overview tab.The products THT-00-XX and THT-01-## appear. 

Activate your catalog area and replicate your catalog

Select Replication → Update Replication and enter catalog ZCAT##.

Page 165: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 165/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-70

2-3 Add the catalog to your B2B WebShop.

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

Log on with your CRM user name.

WebShop: ZB2BSHOP## 

Replace the existing catalog and variant with your catalog data:Catalog: B2BCAT##

Variant: VARIANT_EN_##

Select the Existing Shops button and search for your WebShop ZB2BSHOP##.

Choose the Change button and select the Catalog  tab. Delete the entries PCSHOP 

and VAR_EN . 

Add your catalog and variant: Log on with your CRM user name and choose

your WebShop. Save your entries.

2-4 Start your browser and call up the B2B scenario.URL: http://<webserver:port>/b2b/b2b/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X

Call up your WebShop for business customers ( ZB2BSHOP## ).

Log on to the B2B shop. To log on, use the contact person you created in Unit 2. ( Miller##)

2-4-1 Check whether the products that were assigned to the catalog areas Printers

and Screens display.

2-4-2 If the products do not display, activate the missing elements of your product

catalog and run an update replication for your product catalog.

2-5 Now define a catalog view.

2-5-1 Call the Web catalog maintenance.

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCR

 M80X

Log on with your CRM user name and select the  Product Catalog  link.

2-5-2 Open your ZCAT##  catalog and choose the Views tab and define a new view. Catalog view: View_## 

 Description: Catalog view for group ## 

Select your catalog ZCAT## (click on the name) and select the Change 

button.

Choose the Views tab page and select the Add View button. Now Save the

view

Page 166: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 166/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-71

2-5-3 Select your new view and call up the details ( Manage Views button). Now

select the Screens catalog area since this will be contained in your view and all products. Save your selection.

Go back one step by selecting the button with the green arrow or choosing

the Back to view list  link .

On the previous page, choose the Assign business partner  button. In the upperscreen area, search for the contact person that you created in Unit 2 and add it

to the catalog view.

Save your entries.

Go back one step by selecting the button with the green arrow or choosing

the Back to view list  link.

2-6 Mark the Catalog Search checkbox in the definition of your WebShop.

Choose the Existing Shops link  , search for your shop ZB2BSHPO##, and then

select the Change button.

Choose the Catalog tab and mark the Catalog Search box .

Choose the Save button.

2-7  Perform an update replication for your product catalog.

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X

Log on with your CRM user name and choose the Replication link. Choose the

Update Replication button, select your catalog, and select the Update Replicationbutton .

2-8  Log on to your B2B WebShop with your contact person and check whether the catalogview that you have created appears.

Page 167: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 167/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-72

Page 168: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 168/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-73

(optional)

Unit: Catalog Setup

Topic: Copying Catalog Areas 

Create an Additional Product Catalog by Using Existing Catalog Areas.

3-1 Create an additional product catalog.

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X

Log on with your CRM user name and select the Product Catalog  link  .

Choose the Create button.

Select the Go button.

Variants 

Select the Add Variant  button and then the Save button to save your entries.

Choose the Log off  button.

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

 Name ZCAT##_2

Catalog type Both

 Description Second catalog for group ##

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

 Description US variant

 Language English

Currency USD

Unit of measure type Base unit of measure

 Abbr.: Sales org.: O 50000609

 Distribution channel 30

 Pricing procedure RVCXUS

Page 169: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 169/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-74

3-1-1 Now insert the areas and products from your first product catalog (ZCAT##).

 Notice: This step is only possible in the CRM System!

Menu path within CRM: SAPmenu→ Master Data→ Product Catalog→ 

 Maintain Product Catalog

In the Product Catalog  field, choose your catalog ZCAT##_2 and select theChange button. Choose Edit / Copy from another catalog  from the menu.

Choose the first catalog (ZCAT##) and confirm your entry. In the left

screen area, select your new catalog. In the right screen area, select the

area that you want to copy to the new catalog. Choose the Copy button.

Choose the Save button.

3-1-2 Look at the catalog you have just created and modify it as necessary. 

Page 170: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 170/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-75

Unit: Catalog Setup

Topic: Product Catalog/Catalog Characteristics 

4-1 Assign the Designer  and Manufactured since attributes to your product THT-00-##and maintain values for these two attributes.

4-1-1 Create a new set type ZDESIGN_##.

Menu path: SAPmenu→ Master Data→ Products→ Maintain Set Types

and Attributes.

Select the Set type radio button.

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

Set type name ZDESIGN_##.

 Description Design for group ##

 Product type Material

 Attributes ZDESIGNER

ZMANUFACT_SINCE

Save the set type.

4-1-2 Assign your settype ZDESIGN_## and the General  view to the category

CAT_##  of hierarchy Hier_ISA. 

Menu path: SAPmenu   Master Data Products Maintain Categories

and Hierarchies 

Hierarchy ID: HIER_ISA 

Hierarchy Description: Hierarchy for ISA

Choose the Category CAT_## and assign the set type ZDESIGN_## and

the view GENERAL.

 Save.

Page 171: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 171/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-76

4-1-3 Assign hierarchy HIER_ISA and product category CAT_## to product THT-

00-## (if you have not done it before)

Menu path: SAPmenu   Master Data Products Maintain Products 

Maintain the following fields for product THT-00-##:

Category ID: CAT_##

 Hierarchy ID: Test hierarchy for group ## 

Choose Enter . A new tab page (General ) appears. 

4-1-4 Maintain values of your choice for the two attributes.

Go to General tab and maintain values. 

Designer group: ______________________________________

Manufactured since: ______________________________________

4-2 Maintain a lists of catalog characteristics (LOC) for your product catalogs ZCAT##and ZCAT##. Assign this characteristics list to a catalog area of your product catalog

and run an update replication for your product catalog. Finally, check whether you cansearch in the WebShop on the basis of the new characteristics.

4-2-1 Create a characteristics list called ZLOC##.

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCR M80X (X stands for the last digit of your client)

Log on with your CRM user name and select the  List of Catalog

Characteristic link. Choose Create. 

Catalog characteristics list: ZLOC##Description: List of catalog characteristics for group ##

Assign the following attributes to your list of characteristics:

 Name:  ZMANUFACT_SINCE

Description:  Manufactured since

 Name:  ZDESIGNER 

Description:  Designer group 

In the search bar, select Standard characteristic and search for your

attribute by Number . Choose the attributes by selecting the Plus icon.

The attribute type of your entry should be Standard  and the Entry Type should

 be Simple entry field.

 Save your characteristics list.

Page 172: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 172/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-77

4-2-2 Assign your characteristics list to the Printers area of your product catalog

ZCAT##.

Select the Product Catalog link in the second level navigation and choose

 Product catalog   ZCAT##.

Select the Change button and the Printers area.

Open the Basic Data tab and enter your characteristics list ZLOC## in the

 Area LOC field . 

Choose the Save button .

Check whether the attributes of your characteristics list appear as entry fields

in the item list of the catalog area Printers.

Select the  Item Overview tab and choose one of the area products.

4-2-3 Maintain the fields in the columns Designer for group and Manufactured since

for all products in the area Printers. Save your entriesDeactivate the product (by choosing the Deactivate button) and maintain

the fields . Then activate the products and the catalog area.

4-2-4 Perform an update replication for your product catalog.

Select the Replication link in the second level navigation and then Update

 Replication.

Product Catalog: ZCAT##

Choose Update  Replication.

4-3 Now call up the B2C scenario.

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/b2c/b2c/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

Call up the shop ZB2CSHOP##. Choose Catalog  and the catalog area Printers.

Additional fields for an extended search should now display. Enter a search term and

start the search.

Page 173: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 173/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-78

4-4  Maintain a list of characteristics for your product catalog ZCAT##.

4-4-1 Create a characteristics list called ZLOC##02.

Catalog characteristics list: ZLOC##02Description: List of catalog characteristics 2 ##

Assign the set type : ZDESIGN_##

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCR M80X

Log on with your CRM user and select the List of Catalog Characteristics

link and then on the Create link  .

In the search bar, select Master Characteristic, Number, and then Find .

Choose the set type by selecting the plus icon for the two characteristics.

Check that the attribute type of your two entries will be  Master characteristics and the entry type Simple. 

Save your characteristics list.

4-4-2 Assign your new characteristics list ZLOC##02 to the Printers area of your product catalog ZCAT##.

Choose the Catalog link  in the second level navigation . Choose product

catalog ZB2BCAT##. Choose the Change button and select the Printers 

area. Open the Basic Data tab and enter your characteristics list

ZLOC##02 in the Area LOC  field. Choose Save.

4-4-3 Why do the attributes MANUFACT_SINCE and DESIGNER appear with

values as additional fields in the item list of the catalog area Printers?

Because the attribute type in the list of characteristics was Master

characteristics for both.

4-4-4 Perform an update replication for your product catalog.

Select the Replication link in the second level navigation and then Update

 Replication.

Product Catalog: ZCAT##

Choose Update  Replication. 

4-4-5 Now call up the B2B scenario.

http://<webserver:port>/b2b/b2b/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

Call up the Shop ZB2BSHOP##. Choose Catalog  and the catalog area

 Printers.

Check that now the attributes MANUFACT_SINCE and DESIGNER appearfor product THT-00-##.

Page 174: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 174/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-79

Unit: Catalog Setup

Topic: Product Catalog / Multi-Media Objects 

5-1 On the Internet, find two small and two large images that you could assign to the products in your catalog. Store the selected objects on your local hard drive C: in the

temp-directory.

5-2 Add the images to your product catalog.

URL:http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X

Log on with your CRM user and select the Product  Catalog  link.Product catalog: ZCAT##

Choose the Change button.

Add a thumbnail picture and a large, detailed picture for your product THT-00-##.

Open the catalog area Printers, open the Item Overview tab, and deactivate

material THT-00-##.

Select the product name. Choose the Manage Long Texts and Documents button.

Choose the Item Images tab and select Image. Choose the Add Image button . 

Choose one image from the temp-directory, enter a description (optional) and

 Save.

Do the same for the object type THUMB . 

Repeat this procedure for product THT-01-##.

Before you can check the results in the WebShop, you have to reactivate your products. (Ensure that all the levels of the product catalog are active.)

5-3 Perform an update replication for your product catalog.

Select the Replication link in the second level navigation and then Update

 Replication.

5-4 Start your browser and call up the B2C scenario.

URL: http://<webserver:port>/b2c/b2c/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

Check whether your products are now provided with images.

Page 175: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 175/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-80

Page 176: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 176/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-81

(optional)

Unit: Catalog Setup

Topic: Product Catalog / Document Types

6-1 Create a new catalog type by copying the existing catalog type BOTH. 

Customizing→ Customer Relationship Management→ Master Data→ Product

Catalog→ Define Catalog Types 

Select the row with the catalog type BOTH.

Select the Copy as… pushbutton or choose: Edit→ Copy as...

Field Name or Data Type ValuesCatalog type ZC##

 Description Catalog type for group ##

Confirm the copy procedure and the subsequent information with Enter . Save

your entry.

6-2 Look at the assignment of document types to your new catalog type. How many

document types are assigned to the Folder-Template for Both-Area areas?

Select the row with your catalog type ZC##.

The Folder Template for Both-Area areas is maintained. The definition of this

Folder-Template can be found using SPRO→ Customer Relationship

 Management→ Basic Functions→ Content Management→ Define Templates for

Folders 

Eight document types are assigned to the Folder-Template Both-Area.

Page 177: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 177/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-82

6-3 Create a document class Z##_MP3_XXX.

 Menu path: Customizing→ SAP Web Application Server→ SAP Web Application

Server→ Basis Services→ ArchiveLink→ Basic Customizing→ Document classes 

Choose the  New entries  button

Field Name or Data Type Values

 Document class Z##_MP3_XXX (XXX = client of yourCRM system)

 Description Document class MP3 for group ##

 MIME type audio/mp3

Save your entries.

6-4 Create a document type called Z##_AU_XXX and assign it to the document class youcreated in the previous exercise.

Customizing→ SAP Web Application Server→ SAP Web Application Server→ BasisServices→ ArchiveLink→ Basic Customizing→ Edit Document types 

Choose the New entries button.

Field Name or Data Type Values

 Document type Z##_AU_XXX

 Long Name Document type MP3 for group ##

 Document class Z##_MP3_XXX

Save your entries.

Assign your new document type to a new template for folders

 Menu path: SPRO→ CRM→ Basic Functions→ Content Management→ Define

Templates for Folders 

Choose Both-Areas entry and copy it to Both-Area_##_XXX.

Click with the right-hand mouse button in the space under Name and choose Create

 Folder .

Enter Name Z##_AU_XXX and Description MP3. Go to the Properties tab andmaintain value Z##_AU_XXX for the document type.

 Save your entries.

Page 178: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 178/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-83

6-5 Assign your folder template to your catalog type Both_Area_##_XXX.

Customizing→ Customer Relationship Management→ Master Data→ Product

Catalog→ Define Catalog Types 

Select the row with your catalog type ZC## and click on the details.

In the Folder Templates for areas field, maintain Both_Area_##_XXX.

 Save your entries.

6-6 Create a new product catalog with your catalog type ZC##.

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X

Log on with your CRM user, select the Product Catalog link and choose Create:

Field Name or Data Type Values

 Product catalog ZTEST##

Catalog type Catalog type for group##

Catalog description Text of your choice

Choose the Go button and.

6-7 Only maintain the necessary fields (name and description of your choice) at catalog

header level and create just one catalog area.

Choose the Main Areas tab and select the Add Area button.

Field Name or Data Type Description or Value

Catalog area Area_1

 Description Any

 Save your entries.

6-8 Call up the header data of the catalog area you just created and search for the newdocument type.

Select the area name, choose the Basic Data tab and select the Manage Long

Texts and Documents button . Select the Area Images tab and look at the

document types for the object.

Page 179: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 179/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-84

Page 180: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 180/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-85

(optional)

Unit: Catalog Setup

Topic: Product Catalog / Text Types

In Customizing, Look at the details on the catalog type BOTH. 

7-1 Which text determination procedures are allowed for

c)  (Catalog) areas?

d)  (Catalog) items?

Menu path: Customizing→ Customer Relationship Management→ Master Data→ 

 Product Catalog→ Define Catalog Types 

Select the row with the catalog type BOTH  and choose the Details icon.

(Alternatively, you can also double-click the row with the catalog type BOTH).

Text Determination Procedure for areas: S2

Text Determination Procedure for items: S5

7-2 Take a closer look at the text determination procedure S2. Which text types are

allowed for catalog areas in this procedure?

Menu path: Customizing→ Customer Relationship Management→ Basic Functions

 Text Management→

 Define Text Determination Procedure Select the row with the text object PCAT_CTY.

In the dialog structure, call up the Procedure area

Select the row with the text determination procedure S2.

In the dialog structure, call up the Definition of Procedure area.

Text type 0001 (Description)

Text type 0002 (Heading)

Text type 0003 (Subtitle)

Page 181: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 181/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-86

7-3 Create a new text determination procedure and extend it to include a new text type.

7-3-1 First copy the existing text determination procedure S2 and all dependent

entries.

Call your copy of the text determination procedure TS## and assign the

 Description Text determination procedure for group ##. 

Menu path: Customizing → Customer Relationship Management→ Basic

Functions→ Text Management → Define Text Determination Procedure 

Select the row with the text object PCAT_CTY.

In the dialog structure, call up the Procedure area

Select the row with the text determination procedure S2.

Choose Copy as… or choose Edit Copy as...

Field Name or Data Type Values

TextDetermProc. TS##

 Dscrptn proc. Text determination group ##

Confirm the copy procedure by selecting Enter. Answer the following

system message with Copy all. 

Confirm subsequent information and Save your entries.

7-3-2 For the text object PCAT_CTY (=product catalog area), create a new text type

ZX## (X stands for the last digit of your client) and assign the Description: 

Footer for group ##. 

Menu path: Customizing→ Customer Relationship Management→ Basic Functions→ Text Management→ Define Text Objects and Text Types 

Call up change mode and confirm the message that appears.

Search for text object PCAT_CTY and choose this entry.

The text IDs that can be assigned to a text determination procedure (for a

catalog area) display.

Select the Create button.

Field Name or Data Type Values

Text ID ZX## (X stands for the last digit of

your client)

 Description Footer for group ##

 Save your entries.

Page 182: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 182/416

© SAP AG CR800 3-87

7-3-3 Assign the new text type to your text determination procedure TS##.

Menu path: Customizing→ Customer Relationship Management→ Basic

 Functions→ Text Management→ Define Text Determination Procedure 

Select the row with the text object PCAT_CTY.

In the dialog structure, call up the Procedure area.Select the row with the text determination procedure TS##.

In the dialog structure, call up Definition of Procedure. 

Choose the New entries button.

Field Name or Data Type Values

Text type ZX## (can be chosen via F4 Help)

Sequence 0004

Confirm and save your entry.

7-3-4 Assign the new text determination procedure to your catalog type ZC## (fromthe previous exercise on document types).

Menu path: Customizing→ Customer Relationship Management→ Master

 Data→ Product Catalog→ Define Catalog Types 

Select the line with the catalog type ZC## and choose the Details icon.

(Alternatively, you can also double-click the row with the catalog type

ZC##).

Field Name or Data Type Values

Text Determination

 Procedure for areas

TS##

Text Determination

 Procedure for items

S5 (leave unchanged)

 Save your entry.

7-3-5 Check your settings by

  Creating a product catalog with your catalog type

  Creating a catalog area

  Looking at the possible texts for this catalog area

Page 183: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 183/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-1

SAP AG2004

Order and Contact Processing

8. E-Servicea) Solution Search

b) Service Request Management

c) Complaints and Returns Managementin E-Commerce

9. E-Analytics

Appendix

Units

1. Foundation and Architecture

2. Shop and User Management

3. Catalog Setup

4. Order and Contract Processing

5. Price Determination and ATP

Check

6. Additional E-Selling Scenarios

7. E-Marketing

 

Page 184: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 184/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-2

SAP AG2004

Order and Contract Processing

Order Processing

Batches and Product Determination

Contracts and Contract Negotiation

 

  With CRM 4.0 the functionality of Catalog and Order Management was extended by the following

features:

  Contract Negotiation

  RFQ Processing

  Batches

  Product Determination

  Customer Specific Views for External Catalogs

  OCI Enhancements

  Web Catalog Management

Page 185: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 185/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-3

SAP AG2004

Order and Contract Processing: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Point out the ordering features with CRM E-Commerce

Set up inquiries (request for quotations)

Maintain the organizational data for the Web order 

Set up product determination and contract negotiations

 

Page 186: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 186/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-4

SAP AG2004

Order and Contract Processing I

Order Processing

Batches and product determination

Contracts and contract negotiation

 

Page 187: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 187/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-5

SAP AG2004

Catalog and Order Mgmt…

• In B2B in E-Commerce

• In B2C in E-Commerce

• In B2B for Occasional Users

• With External Catalog Integration

• With One-Step Business

Catalog and Order Mgmt…

• In B2B in E-Commerce

• In B2C in E-Commerce

• In B2B for Occasional Users

• With External Catalog Integration

• With One-Step Business

Order Processing within the Solution Manager 

EE--SellingSelling

E-Commerce scenarios based on ISA (R/3 Edition) not listed

E-Commerce Scenarios:

5 scenario

variants

 

  Catalog and Order Management in E-Commerce

  Provides a centralized product catalog and enables Web customers to receive quotations or place

orders for products and services. This scenario is delivered with a selection of scenario variants, each

differing in specific processes:

  … in B2B in E-Commerce

-  This variant supports you when setting up and offering product catalogs and when selling products

and services to business partners, that is, companies, via the World Wide Web. Marketing

functions play a lesser role here as this scenario concentrates more on allowing the customer to

order the desired products quickly and easily.

  … in B2C in E-Commerce

-  This variant supports the offering of product catalogs and the selling of products and services to

consumers via the World Wide Web. It is designed to offer products attractively, to stimulate purchasing and in doing so maximize profit.

  … in B2B for Occasional Users

-  This variant supports you when setting up and offering product catalogs and when selling products

and services to business partners, that is, companies, via the World Wide Web. The processes are

aimed especially at occasional users.

Page 188: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 188/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-6

  … with External Catalog Integration

-  This variant uses third-party product catalogs for offering products and services via the World

Wide Web to customers.

  … with One-Step Business

-  this variant, Purchasing and Sales can be executed by the buyer and salesperson in one step, using

the relevant SAP systems.

Page 189: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 189/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-7

SAP AG2004

The transaction type used for Web orders

in the CRM system is specified in the Web

shop profile

Transaction Type for Web Order 

Web Shop

Internet

CRM SystemCRM System - Transaction Type (ZIS)

Basic function: Pricing Determination

Partner Determination

Text Determination

- Transaction Type (ZIS)

Option to redetermine pricing

 

  The transaction type used for CRM E-Commerce orders is specified in the Web shop profile. This

transaction type controls the processing of the basic functions in the CRM system.

  Only one transaction type can be specified for orders for each Web shop.

  The same transaction type is used to create sales orders in SAP R/3. When orders are transferred to the

SAP R/3 system, certain basic functions can be performed again (such as pricing).

  Order status

  On header level:

-  Overall status (can be open in case of order related billing)

Open/Completed

-  Delivery statusOpen/Completed (set if all items are completed)

  On item level:

-  Open,

-  Partly delivered (set if deliveries exists but not yet completed),

-  Completed

-  Cancelled

Page 190: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 190/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-8

SAP AG2004

00R/3 dummy division

Division not active

 You maintain within the variant of the product catalog the:

Sales organization

Distribution channel

Responsible organizational unit

The division (at item level) is determined from the product master 

The division (at header level) is defined in the IMG

The sales office is set in the Shop Management

Basic Data

Catalog VariantSales Organ. DChan Pric ing.. UoM T ype Organisation …..

VAR_D Sales US RVCEU130 Base un..

Organizational Data of the Web Order 

ZISTransaction type Sales via Internet

O 50000612Sales Office

Enable offer creation

Order 

US Office Internet Sales

 

  The sales office is assigned to the Web shop (optionally). Within the Web shop it is checked if the sales

office is compatible to indirect assigned sales areas data. The sales office can be used for the catalogdetermination.

  The standard CRM organizational data determination for the sales organization and distribution channel

can not be applied for the Web shop order. The sales area data from the catalog variant is transferred to

the order at order creation time.

  Responsible organizational unit: If no responsible organizational unit is maintained within the catalog

variant, the CRM system will start an organizational determination for this unit.

  The determination of responsible organizational unit is time consuming.

  More than one possible resp. org. unit could be determined, but in web application no selection

dialog possible maybe not correct resp. org. unit assignment.

  Solution:

-  Maintenance of resp. org. unit in product catalog variant.

-  Should be on sales office level or lower if Web shop contains sales office to assure data

correctness.

Page 191: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 191/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-9

SAP AG2004

Optional:Determination of Responsible Organizational Unit

Determination Rule

Attribute

(e.g. Country,

Region)

Organizational Model

Responsible

Organizational Units

Evaluated Attributes

Country: US

Region: MA

Transaction Type

Org. Data Profile

Sales Order 

Business Partner 

Determination Rule

Org. Data Profile

 

  If no responsible organizational unit is maintained within the catalog variant, the CRM system will try

to determine this unit via the logic illustrated above.

  When determining organizational data, the system uses the organizational data profile rule that was

assigned to the transaction type used in the IMG of the CRM system. The determination rule is derived

from this organizational data profile. This determination rule determines which fields are taken into

account when the system determines organizational data from the document data (country and region of

 business partner, for example). Using the evaluated attributes from the CRM document, the responsible

organizational units are determined via the attributes of the organizational model or through defined

responsibility.

Page 192: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 192/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-10

SAP AG2004

Differences between B2B and B2C Web Shop

Creation/Change

Orders

My Favorites

Display

Orders

My Favorites

Saved Baskets

Creation/Change

Orders

Order

Templates

Quotation

Display

Orders

Order

Templates

Quotations

Contracts

Invoices

Credit Memos

Down Payments

History

B2B Web Shop B2C Web Shop

 

  B2B Web shop:

  Catalog:-  Product List, Product Detail, Product Comparison, Personal Recommendations, Special Offers

(Top N)

  Documents:

-  Orders, Order Templates, Quotations, Contracts, Accessories/Alternatives/Related Products

  Product Search

  Direct Entry

  History:

-  Ten least recently used documents

-  Show/Hide feature

-  Realized by cookies

  B2C Web Shop  Catalog:

-  Product List, Product Detail, Product Comparison, Personal Recommendations, Special Offers

(Top N)

  Documents:

-  Orders, Saved Baskets, Accessories/Alternatives/Related Products, My Favorites

  My Favorites

-  Realized by cookies, available in next session without login

Page 193: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 193/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-11

SAP AG2004

Change ship-to address

For whole basket

For line items

Add notes

For whole basket

For line items

Define delivery dates

For whole basket

For line items

Change ship-to address

For whole basket

For line items

Add notes

For whole basket

For line items

Define delivery dates

For whole basket

For line items

B2B Web Shop: Shopping Basket

Change ship-toaddress and delivery

date per item

Header notes

Line item notes

 

  Availability check: Using either SAP R/3 or SAP Advanced Planner & Optimizer (APO)

  Delivery type:

  Normal, express, 24h, and so on

  Display of relevant shipping conditions

  Order Details:

  APO infos (if flag in the shop’s master data is set)

  Remaining quantity (shown in ordered UOM)

  Delivery address (shown only if different from header)

  Deliveries (before CRM 3.0 SP07 via RFC from SAP R/3)

-  Date (can vary from creation of delivery over goods issue date to actual delivery date at customer

location, depending on SAP R/3 customizing)

-  Unit of measurement (in delivery UOM)

-  Link to external package tracking (like UPS, DHL, and so on – separate call to SAP R/3)

-  Badi for modification of order detail: BAdI CRM_ISA_STAT_DETAIL

Page 194: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 194/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-12

SAP AG2004

B2C Web Shop: Payment Forms

PaymentPayment FormsForms

Invoice (default payment type)

Credit card

Cash on delivery

To change settings of payment types:

Exclude payment forms

Propose payment forms

Implement BADI:

CRM_RISK_MGMT_BADI

 

  In the B2C Shop you can offer your customers the following payment forms:

  Invoice

  Payment card

  Cash on delivery

  In the standard system, the invoice is the default payment form.

  In the CRM system, the Business Add-In (BADI) CRM_RISK_MGMT_BUDI is available.

  Using this BADI, you can:

  Exclude payment forms

-  If you think the invoice payment method is too insecure, you can exclude this payment method

using the BADI.

  Propose payment forms

-  Using this BADI, you can set the system to automatically propose cash on delivery to your

customer in Internet Sales.

  Code example:

  Method IF_EX_CRM_RISK_MGMT_BADI~GET_PAYMENTTYPES

  CV_PROPOSED_PAYMENT_TYPE = 1

  Endmethod

  Cash-on-delivery is checked in the Web shop by default

Page 195: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 195/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-13

SAP AG2004

Status Management/Workplace

B2C Web Shop

CRM System

RM System

Transfer 

Creation of a sales

order with long text

Sales order with long text

Flow control

(Workflow)

Workflow work item for 

employee responsible

Order

processing

Status changed/

order releasedNot transferred

to SAP R/3

CRM Customizing 

 

  In the B2C Web shop of CRM E-Commerce the customer can enter a long text in the header of the sales

order.

  With the help of the workflow long texts in sales orders, the employee responsible is informed that an

Internet order has been entered with a long text, and is asked to postprocess this sales order.

  This scenario is only valid for texts at header level of the sales order, in other words, only in the B2C

scenario (text type 1000).

  Customizing: Choose Text Type 1000 in the Header Customizing (Business Transaction Types: Sales)

of the transaction type used for the Web shop.

Page 196: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 196/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-14

SAP AG2004

Automatic Sending of Web Order Confirmations

CRM SystemRM System

Web order created

Smartforms called

Mail send

Action triggered

 

  Three options for the order confirmation of the Web order:

  In Web shop

  E-mail triggered via actions in CRM:

Customizing Path: IMG: CRM Basic Functions Actions

Path Smartforms: TX: SMARTFORMS

  Output determination in SAP R/3

Page 197: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 197/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-15

SAP AG2004

Customer creates a request forquotation

Internal employee releases the request

for quotation

(manual or automatic release of RFQ is

supported)

Customer can reject the quotation or

refer to the quotation and place an order 

Customer creates a request forquotation

Internal employee releases the request

for quotation

(manual or automatic release of RFQ is

supported)

Customer can reject the quotation or

refer to the quotation and place an order 

Request for Quotation (RFQ): Overview

Request for Quotation

  Purpose:

  With this process, a Web shop customer can get a quotation for one or more articles from the product

catalog. The process includes accepting and confirming quotations. The Internet user gets special

conditions for the products required and has the option of requesting a quotation.

  In technical terms, a request for quotation (RFQ) is a quotation with a specific status.

  Negotiation process: Employee releases the RFQ by changing the status.

Page 198: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 198/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-16

SAP AG2004

RFQ: Settings in the Web Shop Profile

Shop Management

General Information Catalog Order  Marketing

 

  There are two quotation types (you can use just one type for each Web shop):

  1. Lean or Simple Quotations (implemented with CRM 2.0B):

  A quotation is created based on the transaction type used for orders in the Web shop (like TA or

ISBB)

  Extended by date profile to carry validity date (i.e. QUOTE001)

  If this type of quotation is requested, the same document is converted into an order.

  Status: Open (can be ordered immediately), completed

  2. Request for Quotation (RFQ, CRM Quotation):

  The transaction type for quotations is taken from the field Order Type for quotations, and may differ

from the transaction type for orders. The AGIS transaction type (Quoation for Internet Sales)delivered by SAP, enables you to obtain a quotation (RFQ) with release and authorization procedure

in one scenario. The request for the quotation takes place in this case by creating a follow-up

document (by copy control).

  Implemented with CRM 3.0 SP 13 and CRM 3.1 SP 6.

  Are real CRM quotations.

Page 199: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 199/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-17

  Standard process type AGIS

Status profile: CRMQT_IS

Action profile: QUOTATION_IS

  Status: open, confirmed (can be ordered), accepted (ordered), expired (end of validation date reached)

  Quotation and Order are linked via DOC_FLOW.

  With note 646089 it is possible to handle cancelled positions in ISales.

Page 200: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 200/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-18

SAP AG2004

RFQ: Creation

Add note to ask for 

discounts and rebates

B2B Web Shop

RFQ Processing

A Request for quotation (RFQ)

Is an inquiry by the customer and

In technical terms a quotation with a specific status

Internal employee releases the RFQ by modifying the status

Customer can then place an order with reference to the quotation

 

  Prerequisites for the Request for Quotation (RFQ) Processing

  You have set the Request for Quotation flag in the Shop Management  application to enable requests

for quotations.

  You are using the standard delivery transaction types AGIS  and ISBB in your Web shop.

  Available status:

  1. Request for Quotation (CRM quotations):

-  Open

-  Confirmed (can be ordered)

-  Accepted (ordered)

-  Expired (end of validation date reached)

  2. Lean or Simple Quotations (ISA quotations):

-  Open (can be ordered immediately)

-  Completed

Page 201: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 201/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-19

SAP AG2004

RFQ: Release Process

In the employee's CRM Inbox the RFQ appears, the employee

can maintain the price and the text

 

  Within the CRM you can change the status of the quotation and assign a price manually.

Page 202: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 202/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-20

SAP AG2004

Order and Contract Processing II

Order Processing

Batches and product determination

Contracts and contract negotiation

 

Page 203: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 203/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-21

SAP AG2004

Batches

Icon indicates a batch

product and expands

the fields below

For scenario one:

enter a specific batch number 

What are batches?

Materials that require such precise identification,

for example pharmaceutical products,

are identified and managed in stock not onlyaccording to material number, but also according

to batch  number .

Two business scenarios supported:

1.Reorder of batches

  Customer can type in batch number know from a previous order

  Batches can also be selected from drop down box

  Entries of the drop down box are filled by a BADI (CRM_BATCH_ISA_BADI) which by default

calls into R/3 (batch master records are not replicated to CRM)

  Batches are only supported in shopping basket, not in catalog

2. Input of batch selection criteria

  Customer can enter batch selection criteria for batch products classified accordingly

(batch class 023)  Batch selection criteria are used for ATP-check and forwarded to follow up documents

  Batch determination takes place in SAP R/3 at point in time of delivery processing

Prerequisite:

  SAP R/3 4.6b or higher

Page 204: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 204/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-22

SAP AG2004

Batch Determination

Example for scenario two:

Customer can enter batch selectioncriteria for product BM_1000 

 

Steps for customizing:

Sys ToDo

  R/3 Setup master data (class, characteristics, product, batches)

  R/3, CRM Synchronize the customizing settings of the classification

  CRM Assign product set type COMM_PR_BATCH

  R/3, CRM Initial data transfer of classification data

  R/3, CRM Initial data transfer of products

  CRM Check data (class, characteristics, product)

  CRM Definition of BAdI for: value help batch

input check batch, filter ISA characteristics

  CRM Setup B2B master data (shop, catalogue, customer..)  ISA Customize shop for batch handled products; set the flag Batch Processing Permitted

in the web based Shop Administration tool under the tab Order .

  If the product is handled in batches and the Web shop support batch processing, the user is able to

maintain batches.

  Note: Batch processing is only supported for B2B scenario and only in the shopping basket, not in the

 product catalog.

Page 205: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 205/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-23

SAP AG2004

Product Determination

Product Determination

Two Scenarios: Customer supports several material codes to identify product

Customer uses condition based product substitution

Relevant to quick order entry of the B2B scenario

Customer can use different customer specific product numbers

during order entry

Product determination maps to general CRM product number 

1:n relationship possible (customer specific: CRM product number);

in this case a pop up appears and the customer can then select the

required product manually

Customer specific product number is stored within the CRM order

and is also transferred to SAPR/3

 

  The target of the customizing feature Product Determination and substitution is to enable the SAP

Internet Sales 4.0 for B2B, to handle entered product ids that resolve to more than one systemproduct ID and to support the substitution of a product by another product.

  As long as the determination results in a single system product ID, no user interaction is necessary, but

there may be situations when an entered product ID matches more than one system product ID or

substitute products. In those cases the user will be asked to choose the correct entry from the found

system product IDs, respective of substitute products.

  If product determination has taken place, the information as to what system product ID an entered

 product ID was mapped can be shown in the shopping basket, dependent of Customizing.

.

Page 206: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 206/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-24

SAP AG2004

Product Determination

Step one:

Enter product in the fast entry mode

Step two:

Product number is not unique and

customer has to choose the correct

entry

Step three:

The chosen entry is transferred into

the shopping basket

 

Page 207: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 207/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-25

SAP AG2004

Product Determination/Alternative ID

Situation after product

determination has taken place

•Customer sees to what system product iDan entered product id (e.g. partner product

number) was mapped

entered product number 

system product ID

(to show this information is customizable)

Page 208: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 208/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-26

SAP AG2004

Product Determination Flow

In case user-specific product ID cannot automatically be resolved to a

single system product ID or more than one substitute product is defined

Document 0815

Pos1 , Usr Id 4711

Pos2

Pos1 ,

Syst Id 1418

Syst Id 0007

...

Update

Document 0815

Pos1 , Usr Id 4711, Syst Id 1418

Pos2

Non-

ambiguous

determination/

substitution

All ambiguities

resolved

Ambiguous

determination/

substitution

Not all ambiguities

resolved

User inquiry

 

  Steps for customizing:

Settings for CRM

  Define a profile for alternative product Ids in Customizing. For this, choose Customer Relationship

 Management →  Cross-Application Components →  SAP Product →  Alternative Product IDs →  

 Define Profiles in the Implementation Guide.

  Assigned the profile to the required transaction type in Customizing.

  For partner products, maintain partner product in the product master.

  For GTINs, maintaine these in the product master.

Settings for Internet Sales:

  Set the flag Display product determination information in the Web based Shop Management Toolhttp://<web server>:<port>/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do

under the tab Order  to see the system product ID and the reason for substitution at item level.

  Product determination is only supported for CRM Internet Sales business-to-business scenario.

Page 209: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 209/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-27

SAP AG2004

Order and Contract Processing III

Order Processing

Batches and product determination

Contracts and contract negotiation

 

Page 210: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 210/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-28

SAP AG2004

Contracts are long-term agreements with customers that allowthem to buy products at special conditions, such as lower

prices or favorable terms of delivery.

Contracts are long-term agreements with customers that allow

them to buy products at special conditions, such as lower

prices or favorable terms of delivery.

Contract Management in E-Commerce

Contract Definition:

Contract Management in E-Commerce

Organizational Units

Master Data

Business Processes

Collaborative Contract Negotiation

Release Order Processing (E-Commerce)

Solution Manager Solution Manager 

Contract DefinitionContract Definition

 

  Within CRM sales contracts, you can define:

  Target value and/or target quantity, price agreements, releasable products,and completion rule

  Dates and date rules, actions that are planned and triggered automatically, cancellation dates and

rules

  A contract can contain one or more products which can be grouped (for example, by a partner product

range)

Page 211: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 211/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-29

SAP AG2004

Overview: Distribution of Contract Data

SAP CRM

Distribution of Order Data

Creating Order Selection of Contract Data

Replication of Contract Data

SAP R/3

B2B Web shop

 Access to contract data through

• catalog browsing or • contract browsing

 

  Completion of a Contract

  You can customize whether the target value or quantity of the contract:

-  Can be exceeded

-  Cannot be exceeded

-  Can only be exceeded once

  The system should automatically set the status of a contract to completed when the target value or

quantity has been reached.

  Actions for contracts

  You can create follow-up documents like a Phone Call

  If the released value < 90% of target value

  One week before contract end date

  You release products from a sales contract by submitting a sales order:

  For the release order you can use the standard sales order type.

  The date of the release order should lie within the contract validity period. Otherwise, the system

issues a warning.

  The system updates the quantity and/or value released and records it in the contract.

  Before you can release products, you have to release the items in the contract.

Page 212: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 212/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-30

SAP AG2004

Display of Contract Data within the B2B Web Shop

Catalog Browsing

Catalog Browsing

Order

  Contract call off

Order

  Contract call off

Contract Browsing

Contract Browsing

Login to B2B shop

Login to B2B shop

 

  When ordering products, the corresponding contract numbers and items are transferred to the shopping

 basket, allowing for request orders (or call offs) from contracts  In the catalog customer contract specific data can be displayed. It is freely customizable, which contract

specific fields appear within the:

  Product list in the catalog

  Product details view in the catalog

  Contract view

Hints:

  Contracts offered for browsing are restricted to the distribution chain of the catalog variant

  No manual entry of the contract in the item line of the order entry, since assignment and change of the

contract is not supported by CRM order after item creation

  No search for contract number or attributes within catalogs (data are not available on the search index)

  No search for products within contracts

  A contract can contain one or more products grouped by a partner product range

  The customer can access a list of contracts for a sold-to party 

Determination of contract item price:

  Catalog/contract browsing: Determination of contract item price via price calculator of catalog using

attributes of catalog variant

  Order entry: Determination of item price via CRM order

Page 213: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 213/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-31

SAP AG2004

Contracts in the B2B Web Shop: Customizing

Shop Management 

CRM Customizing 1. Definition of contract attributes

to be displayed in the Web shop

product list

product detail

contract item detail

2. Shop Management

enabling contracts

determination

setting of contract profile

3. Customizing for contract

specific conditions:Definition of conditions

groups

Assignment of condition

group to e.g. item category

 

  Definition of contract attributes (e.g. released quantities/values, target quantities/values, valid

from/to, and shipping conditions) to be displayed in the Web shop. You find the settings in the viewOrder within the Shop Management.

  Definition of contract specific conditions:

  Maintenance of pricing agreements in contracts

  Customizing:

a) Definition of conditions groups:

CRM transactions settings for contracts price agreements and configuration 

define and assign group of condition tables and types

 b) Assignment of condition group to item category or transaction type

Page 214: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 214/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-32

SAP AG2004

Contract Negotiation: Overview

Customer  Brand Owner 

SAP CRM

Change detailsof contract

Review

contract inquiry

Send quotation

for contract backto customer 

Perform

credit check

SAP R/3

System performs

credit check

Create follow–upactions

Release items

System convertsquotation

to contract

Contract Negotiation

Customer sends a contract

inquiry

Employee creates a contract

quotation

Customer has three options:

Accept

Reject

New proposal

Employee releases the

contract for call offs

Customer can make some

additional simple changes

(ship-to-address)

Accept

quotation

Send inquiry

Create inquiry

for contract

Log on to

Web Shop

 

Contract Negotiation Process comprises the following steps:

  Customer browses in catalog and adds products to a new contract inquiry.

  Customer adds contract specific data like validity period, prices and rebates target value/quantity and

sends the inquiry to the vendor.

  Vendor receives the contract inquiry and evaluates the requested contract. He or she may change some

data and send this contract quotation back to the customer.

  Customer verifies the proposal of the vendor and

  Changes some data and sends the inquiry back to vendor

  Accepts contract quotation and sends it back to vendor

  Disagrees with vendor’s proposal and rejects contract

  When customer has accepted on the contract negotiation vendor releases contract.

  Customer can still do some simple changes (like ship-to-address) or cancel the contract.

Hints:

  You can assign single products to contract items (and not product hierarchies and partner-product-

ranges (PPRs).

  Either value or quantity contracts will be offered in the Web shop.

Page 215: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 215/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-33

SAP AG2004

Shop Management

Contract Negotiation

InquiryInquiry

QuotationQuotation

 

Contract negotiation customizing

  Shop Maintenance:

  Flag that enables contract negotiations in ISA B2B

  Group of transaction types for creating contract inquiries

  CRM Customizing:

  Transaction type maintenance: Field for value/quantity contract

  Customizing for Contracts: Assign two condition types for desired price and price simul.

-  Condition type for contract inquires (price, rebate)

-  Corresponding condition type for ‚real‘ contract price (price simulation)

  Definition of a transaction type for contract negotiations (e.g. ZCNV)

Page 216: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 216/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-34

  Creation of a user status profile (e.g. CRMCONEG) in IMG activity “Define Status Profile for User

Status”. Two user statuses are required to enable the determination of the actual processor

(vendor/customer):

-  (initial) Status 1 (IPCU) for being processed by customer (assign trans. STCU)

-  Status 2 (IPVE) for being processed by vendor: (assign trans. STVE)

  Creation of a text determination procedure to enable the exchange of notes between customer and

vendor

-  Text type 1 for a description or note

-  Text type 2 for an automatically generated log or history of all the texts

  Definition of an item category for the transaction type

-  item object type: CRM Quantity/Value Contract

-  quotation data: Relevance for quotation field: Initial inquiry

Subsequent processing: Quotation status is reset

  Conditions: Creation of condition types for contract inquires (dummy conditions)

Page 217: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 217/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-35

SAP AG2004

Order and Contract Processing: Unit Summary

You are now able to:

Point out the ordering features with CRM E-Commerce

Set up Request for Quotations

Maintain the organizational data for the Web order 

Set up product determination and contracts for the Web shop

 

Page 218: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 218/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-36

Page 219: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 219/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-37

Exercises

Unit: Order and Contract Processing

Topic: Organizational Data

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:

•  Explain the determination of responsible organizational units in CRM.

Do not make any changes to the organizational structure, since this

could affect the other exercises in the course. 

1-1 You have to analyze the settings for the scenario in which sales orders are created via the Web

shop.

1-1-1 Take a look at the catalog variant VAR_EN .

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X

Log on with your CRM user.

Product catalog: PCSHOP

Take a look at catalog variant VAR_EN . Which sales organization and distribution

channel have been maintained?

 ____________________________________________________

 ____________________________________________________

1-1-2 Analyze the Web shop PC4YOUX_EN (B2C) or PC4BIZX_EN (B2B).

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X

Select the shop PC4YOU_EN (B2C) or PC4BIZ_EN (B2B) and choose Details.

Is a sales office assigned to the Web shop?

 ____________________________________________________

Page 220: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 220/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-38

1-1-3 In the CRM system, take a look at the organizational units determined at header level

and at item level for your order (created in exercise of Unit 2).

SAPmenu→  Sales →  Maintain Sales Transactions 

Button: Open Business Transaction 

Maintain the order number from the B2B exercise in Unit 2 and press Enter . 

 ____________________________________________________  

1-1-4 Can you see a division at header level in the CRM document? Explain the differences

 between header and item level as regards the division.

 ____________________________________________________

 ____________________________________________________

1-1-5 In the CRM system, where can you set the missing division at header level for thedocument transfer to the SAP R/3 system?

 ____________________________________________________

 ____________________________________________________

1-1-6 Log onto the SAP R/3 system and check the sales organization, distribution channel,

division, and sales office found at header level in the corresponding sales document.

SAP R/3: Logistics →  Sales and Distribution→  Sales →  Order →  Display

Enter the order number and choose Enter .

Menu: Goto →  Header →  Sales

 ____________________________________________________

 ____________________________________________________

 ____________________________________________________  

Page 221: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 221/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-39

Solutions

Unit: Order and Contract Processing

Topic: Organizational Data

1-1 You will analyze the settings for the scenario for creating sales orders in the Web shop.

1-1-1 Take a look at the catalog variant VAR_EN .

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X

Log on with your CRM user.

Choose Product Catalog . 

Product catalog: PCSHOP  

Choose PCSHOP . 

Take a look at catalog variant VAR_EN .

Choose Variants. 

Which sales organization and distribution channel have been maintained? 

Choose Details.

Sales organization:  Sales US (O 50000609)

Distribution channel: 30

1-1-2 Analyze the Web shop PC4YOU_EN (B2C) or PC4BIZ_EN (B2B).

URL: 

http://<webserver>:50000/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM8

0X

Log on with your CRM user and choose Existing Shops.

Search for shop PC4YOU_EN (B2C) or PC4BIZ_EN (B2B), choose the underlinedshop name and choose tab Order .

Is a sales office assigned to the Web shop? 

Yes, sales office O 50000612 (US Office Internet Sales) is assigned to the Web

shop (under tab Order ).

Page 222: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 222/416

© SAP AG CR800 4-40

1-1-3 In the CRM system, take a look at the organizational units determined at header level

and at item level for your order (created in exercise of unit 2).

SAPmenu →  Sales →  Maintain Sales Transactions 

Button: Open Business Transaction 

Maintain the order number from the B2B exercise in Unit 2 and press Enter .

Header level:Go to the tab Organization.

Sales organization:  Sales US  

Distribution channel: 30 (Internet Sales)

Division:  None at header level  

Item level:

Choose Item detail  and select the tab Organization.

Sales organization:  Sales US  

Distribution channel: 30 (Internet Sales)

Division: 07 (High Tech) 

1-1-4 Can you see a division at header level in the CRM document? Explain the differences

 between header and item level as regards the division.

There is no division at header level in the CRM document. The division is only

listed at item level. This division information always comes from the product

master.

1-1-5 In the CRM system, where can you set the missing division at header level for the

document transfer to the SAP R/3 System?

Transaction: SPRO SAP Reference IMG Customer Relationship

 Management Master Data Organizational Management Division Settings

 Define Use of Division and Dummy Division

1-1-6 Log onto the SAP R/3 system and check the sales organization, distribution channel,

division, and sales office found at header level in the corresponding sales document.

SAP R/3: Logistics →  Sales and Distribution→  Sales →  Order →  Display

Enter the order number and choose Enter .

Menu: Goto →  Header →  Sales

Sales organization: 3020

Distribution channel: 30

Division: 00 

Page 223: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 223/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-1

SAP AG2004

Price Determination and ATP Check

8. E-Servicea) Solution Search

b) Service Request Management

c) Complaints and Returns Managementin E-Commerce

9. E-Analytics

Appendix

Units

1. Foundation and Architecture

2. Shop and User Management

3. Catalog Setup

4. Order and Contract Processing

5. Price Determination and ATP

Check

6. Additional E-Selling Scenarios

7. E-Marketing

 

Page 224: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 224/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-2

SAP AG2004

Price Determination and ATP Check

ATP Check

Availability Check using the Advanced

Planner and Optimizer APO)

ATP using SAP R/3

Price determination within the Web shop

 

  ATP = Available-to-Promise

Page 225: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 225/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-3

SAP AG2004

Price Determination and ATP Check: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Describe the availability check either based on the SAP Advanced

Planner & Optimizer (APO) or the SAP R/3

Outline how the IPC is integrated and used in the E-commerce

scenario

 

Page 226: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 226/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-4

SAP AG2004

Price Determination and ATP Check:Business Scenario

Our company wants to display up-to-date prices within the Web

shop. Additionally, customer specific pricing is required for the

B2B Web shop.

Product availability should be displayed in the Web shop.

 

Page 227: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 227/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-5

SAP AG2004

Price Determination and ATP Check I

ATP Check

Availability Check using the Advanced

Planner and Optimizer APO)

ATP using R/3

Price determination within the Web shop

 

  ATP = Available-to-Promise

Page 228: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 228/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-6

SAP AG2004

In the Web shop, there are two options for performing

an availability check:

1. Global ATP with SAP APO

2. ATP using the SAP R/3

In the Web shop, there are two options for performing

an availability check:

1. Global ATP with SAP APO

2. ATP using the SAP R/3

Global ATP with SAP APO

Shop Management

Internet Sales specific availability information

using SAP R/3 (obsolete)

Availability check control

CRM integrated availability check (SAP APO)

or availability information (SAP R/3)

General Information Catalog Order  Marketing

ATP = Available-to-Promise

APO = Advanced Planner & Optimizer 

 

  If the system recognizes that an SAP APO System is connected, a complete availability check is carried

out via SAP APO.

  If no SAP APO System is connected, an availability information is carried out against SAP R/3.

  ATP Check with APO

  Global, multi-site, real-time ATP with temporary reservation

  Rule-based, multi-level ATP

-  Alternative locations

-  Alternative products (substitutes)

  ATP Check with SAP R/3

  Snapshot of current stock

  Reservation after order was saved successfully in SAP R/3 System

Page 229: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 229/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-7

SAP AG2004

R/3

or

CRM

R/3

or

CRM

Supply Chain Cockpit APO)

upply Chain Cockpit APO)

ATP

TP

TP

DeploymentDeploymentDeployment

Demand PlanningDemand PlanningDemand Planning

Sales

order 

Production

Planning and

Detailed

Scheduling

ProductionProduction

Planning andPlanning and

DetailedDetailed

SchedulingSchedulingSupply

Network

Planning

SupplySupply

NetworkNetwork

PlanningPlanning

Integration of ATP in APO Architecture

Historical

data

Key figures

(KPIs)

 

  APO = Advanced Planner & Optimizer

  The integration of the CRM and APO systems is carried out by Business Application Programming

Interfaces (BAPIs) in CRM and SAP R/3.

  Sales orders trigger a Global ATP check, which (depending on the configuration) can use inventory,

 production plans, deployment plans, and various items of planning data to calculate the correct

availability result.

Page 230: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 230/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-8

SAP AG2004

SAP APO

Global, multi-site, real-time ATP

Rules-based, multi-level ATP

Alternative locations

Alternative products

Integrated with Production Planning

Fast response times as a result of

using liveCache for product availability

check

ATP RequestATP RequestATP Request

+20

-10

+10

Produce

Global ATP in APO: Features

ConfirmationConfirmationConfirmation

SAP

CRM

or

R/3

 

  Further advantage of SAP APO: Relieve the load on SAP R/3.

  Global ATP is integrated in the Supply Chain Management (SCM) processes for all kinds of order

 processing.

  In many SAP R/3 systems, ATP functionality is restricted or not possible at all. For example, in older

versions of SAP R/3 an availability check only searched the local inventory for available products and

assumed infinite capacity when a product had to be produced.

  When it comes to production, the availability check uses functionality to check the actual order network

including all constraints.

  The rules-based ATP check is the basis for checking alternative products in alternative locations, as

well as for production.

Page 231: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 231/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-9

SAP AG2004

B2B Web shop

CRM Server CRM Server 

OLTP R/3OLTP R/3 APO SystemAPO System

14

2

8

7

5

9

Create sales order on Internet (Web shop)

User chooses product, quantity, date in shop. basket

User chooses Enter 

CRM calls APO to check availability APO makes temporary reservation

 APO transfers ATP check results to CRM

CRM displays ATP information in Web shop

User saves order in CRM

CRM calls APO to finalize reservation

CRM transfers order to SAP R/3

SAP R/3 calls up ATP results from APO

SAP R/3 posts order to APO and reservation is

transformed into a requirement

3

2

1

9

7

6

5

4

6

8

Availability Check with APO in the B2B Scenario

3

 

  In the scenario above the ATP check is carried out only by the SAP APO.

  The integration of the CRM and APO systems ensures that the data required for the APO system is

transferred from the CRM system, and that the results of the availability check and scheduling are

transferred to CRM and SAP R/3.

  The sales order is saved in the CRM system. The requirements are then saved in the APO system but

are not relevant for materials planning until the sales order is transferred to the SAP R/3 system and

saved.

  After the ATP check, the following parameters for each item are transferred back to the CRM system:

  Country shipped to (for tax reasons) and region

  Confirmed quantities

  Confirmed dates

Page 232: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 232/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-10

SAP AG2004

Define ATP profile

Assign ATP profile to item category

The requirements profile in APO controls

how the availability check is performed

CRM Customizing Settings for APO-ATP

Create an ATP profile that corresponds to the requirements profile in APO

 Assign the ATP profile to the item category for which an availability

check has to be performed 

 

  The ATP profile in each sales order item is transferred from the CRM system to the APO system. In the

APO system, the ATP profile becomes the requirements profile that is used as a key for carrying out theATP check. The requirements profile determines how the availability check is performed.

  The integration of CRM and APO is controlled in the item category of the sales order. In the

customizing, you must ensure that the name of the ATP profile assigned to the item category

corresponds to the requirements profile used in the APO system (for example, ATP profile = 100 

requirements profile =100).

  You maintain the ATP profile in CRM Customizing under SPRO CRM Basic Functions 

Availability Check  Define ATP Profile.

  You assign the ATP profile to the item category as follows: SPRO  CRM Basic Functions  

Availability Check  Assign ATP Profile to Item Category.

  You assign the location under SPRO  CRM Availability Check Assign Location in CRMOnline to Location in SAP APO.

Page 233: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 233/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-11

SAP AG2004

In the Web shop, there are two options for performing

an availability check:

1. Global ATP with SAP APO

2. ATP using SAP R/3

In the Web shop, there are two options for performing

an availability check:

1. Global ATP with SAP APO

2. ATP using SAP R/3

ATP Using SAP R/3

Shop Management

Internet Sales specific availability information

using SAP R/3 (obsolete)

Availability check control

CRM integrated availability check (SAP APO)

or availability information (SAP R/3)

General Information Catalog Order  Marketing

 

  The Internet Sales-specific availability information is obsolete and is no longer further developed.

SAP recommends that you use the setting for the CRM-integrated availability check (SAP APO)availability information (SAP R/3) because this solution is further developed.

  CRM-integrated solution: One of the advantages is that the SAP CRM server recognizes whether an

SAP APO system is linked and directs the availability request against SAP APO or SAP R/3

correspondingly. In addition, the system can also display several schedule lines item-related during an

availability information against SAP R/3 (SAP E-Commerce <= 3.1).

  Snapshot of current SAP R/3 warehouse stock including planned inward movements (production orders,

 purchase orders, and so on) and planned outward movements (sales orders, deliveries, reservations, and

so on).

  Availability check performed in R/3 by function module BAPI_MATERIAL_AVAILABILITY:

  Input: Plant, material number, unit, requested quantity, and date  Output: Confirmed quantities and dates

  Browser Input

  B2B: Product, quantity, unit, and requested delivery date

  B2C: Product and quantity (requested delivery date = sy-datum, unit = unit which has been

maintained in the product catalog variant)

Page 234: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 234/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-12

  Browser Output: Product number, product description, confirmed quantity, and date

  In the B2C scenario, the system always displays the current date as the delivery date in the shopping

 basket. But you can use the modification example in note 539426 to influence the delivery date

determined in the shopping basket.

  See note 684784 to obtain all ATP check lines in the product details of the B2B shop

Page 235: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 235/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-13

SAP AG2004

ATP Check and Price Determination

ATP Check

Availability Check using the Advanced

Planner and Optimizer APO)

ATP using R/3

Price determination within the Web shop

 

Page 236: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 236/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-14

SAP AG2004

CRM

Determination of Pricing Procedure

For pricing in Web shop catalog

Required pricing procedure within the catalog variant

For pricing in Web shop shopping basket /

check out and in SAP CRM

Pricing procedure determined within the CRM system

For pricing in SAP R/3 system

Pricing procedure determined within the R/3 system

Pricing type in CRM table SMOFPARSFA.

(This determines which pricing type is to be used in the R/3 system)

Example: Pricing type “G” =

Copy pricing elements unchanged (from CRM)

and redetermine taxes (in R/3)

R/3

 

  The potential determination of different pricing procedure within the Web shop, CRM, and in the back

end should be taken into account in order to achieve consistent pricing.  For reasons of performance it is recommended to use a lean pricing procedure for the Web catalog (for

example, just price and tax) and a different pricing procedure (including rebates, and so on) for the Web

shop basket and the CRM order.

  Document currency, customer group, price list, price group: In the Web shop catalog these pricing

attributes are taken:

  In the B2C shop: From the catalog variant (regardless whether the customer is logged on)

  In the B2B shop: From the sold-to party

  In the CRM order only the pricing attributes sales organization and distribution channel  are taken from

the product catalog variant.

  Customizing settings:

  Pricing in the Web shop catalog: Catalog maintenance  assign pricing procedure to catalogvariant

  Pricing in Web shop shopping basket/check out and SAP CRM

-  Pricing procedure: SAP implementation guide activity: Determine Pricing Procedures

  Pricing in SAP R/3:

-  Pricing type: maintain the following entries in the CRM table SMOFPARSFA

PARSFAKEY R3A_SALES

PARNAME PRICING TYPE

PARVAL1 for example, G (copy pricing elements unchanged and redetermine taxes)

Page 237: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 237/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-15

SAP AG2004

Shop Management

List Prices on the Index Server (optional)

Condition type Condition table Catalog price type (e.g. list price)

 

  Reading prices from the Index server means that catalog price determination takes place using the Index

server (instead of the IPC). Price determination takes place during product catalog replication.

  If you are using this option, it is necessary to republish the product catalog whenever you change a list

 price.

  All pricing displayed in the Web catalog is read from the Index server.

  Use this type of price determination if prices in the Web catalog are to be non-customer-specific, that is

all customers are shown the same price for a product.

  You maintain the parameters for list prices in the catalog variants of the product catalog. Enter the value

list price in the catalog price type. When defining the Web catalog (in Shop Management) you select

the choice read from index under the controlling catalog price determination section.

Page 238: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 238/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-16

SAP AG2004

  In general SAP R/3 pricing data is used for the Web shop, as

the order will be uploaded to SAP R/3  In general SAP R/3 pricing data is used for the Web shop, as

the order will be uploaded to SAP R/3

Source: SAP R/3 and CRM

Source: R/3Master data and Customizing are maintained

in the back end

This data can be transferred to CRM by

means of downloads

Source: CRMMaster data and Customizing are completely

maintained in CRM

The data exists exclusively in CRM and will not

normally be downloaded back to the back end

Sources of Pricing Data within the Web Shop

The master data and customizing for pricing are maintained in R/3

and/or in CRM

SAP R/3 customizing can only use SAP R/3 pricing data

(conditions)

Customizing in CRM cannot be loaded to the back end

 

  If the master data (the IPC uses for pricing) is downloaded from the SAP R/3 system, both IPC and

SAP R/3 system use:

  The same condition technique based on pricing procedure, condition types, access sequences, and

condition tables

  The same customizing data

  The same master data (condition records)

  If a CRM order with a CRM specific price (e.g. 0PR0) is uploaded to SAP R/3, the SAP R/3 order will

not have not price. But a new price determination will find a SAP R/3 specific price (for example,

PR00).

  Via view MNTCNT (SAP R/3, transaction SM30) you can define which SAP R/3 condition types you

can, against the general rule, maintain in CRM.

Please note:

  SAP R/3 is written in ABAP and the IPC in Java.

  Customizing loaded from the back end cannot be changed in CRM.

  Customizing in CRM cannot be loaded to the back end.

Page 239: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 239/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-17

SAP AG2004

1. J2EE AS: Event Add to basket

2. IPC: Create Item (document)

3. IPC: Get Pricing Info

4. J2EE AS: Display Pricing Info in shopping

basket5. J2EE AS: Event Check out

6. CRM: Create sales order 

7. J2EE AS: Display CRM order confirmation

IPCIPC

1.

2.3.

6.

4

Shopping Basket Data Flow – B2C

5.

7.

CRM

J2EEJ2EE

ApplicationApplication

Server Server 

B2C Shop

 

  When a product is added to the shopping basket, an IPC item is added to the IPC document. An IPC

document is created for each shopping basket.

  Pricing is performed for the IPC item. The pricing results are then displayed in the shopping basket.

  For the CRM sales order, an order confirmation is displayed in the Web shop.

  Debugging Hint: Direct debugging of fm CRM_ISA_PRICING_HDRDATA_GET via Tx SE37 in the

CRM.

Page 240: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 240/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-18

SAP AG2004

IPC shopping basket

IPC document

Stores all the IPC data

(including pricing, configuration)

Is only a temporary document

CRM order

Is created when

The shopping basket is ordered

The shopping basket is saved

(saved shopping baskets are stored likeorders in CRM)

B2C: Processing the Shopping Basket

B2C Shop

 

  Use the IPC to store shopping basket data for:

  Better performance

  No availability information in shopping basket

  Transfer pricing data to the CRM order:

  For all the items at the same time

  When orders are created

  When shopping baskets are saved

Page 241: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 241/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-19

SAP AG2004

CRM shopping basket

CRM order with status

Stores all the CRM order data including pricing, configuration

Becomes a normal order when status is removed

Temporary IPC document

Is needed to retrieve pricing information

Stores IPC-related data

No need to reread from CRM

When the configuration is changed

When the quantity is changed

B2B: Processing the Shopping Basket

 

  In the B2B Shop, for each shopping basket a CRM order is directly created (first on a temporary basis).

This has the following consequences:

  Direct availability information

  Required delivery date possible

  Performance

  Transfer pricing data to the CRM order:

  For every new item

  When new items are created

  When existing items are changed

  A temporary reference table contains GUIDs of the CRM shopping basket and the IPC document. Thistable is processed in the CRM API function group for the shopping basket and is updated whenever the

item is changed.

Page 242: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 242/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-20

SAP AG2004

B2B Web Shop

Pricing Analysis in the Web

<!-- turn on IPC price analysis and enable pricing conditions display -->

<context-param>

<param-name>priceAnalysis.isa.sapmarkets.com</param-name>

<param-value>true</param-value>

Web.xml

 

  With CRM 4.0 SP06 the parameter enable.priceanalysis can be maintained via XCM (XCM file:

\sap\configuration\config-data.xml).Path in admin tool: Start  Components  SAP ui default

Page 243: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 243/416

© SAP AG CR800 5-21

SAP AG2004

Price Determination and ATP Check: Unit Summary

You are now able to:

Describe the availability check either based on the SAP Advanced

Planner & Optimizer (APO) or the SAP R/3

Outline how the IPC is integrated and used in the E-commerce

scenario

 

Page 244: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 244/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-1

SAP AG2004

Additional E-Selling Scenarios

8. E-Servicea) Solution Search

b) Service Request Management

c) Complaints and Returns Managementin E-Commerce

9. E-Analytics

Appendix

Units

1. Foundation and Architecture

2. Shop and User Management

3. Catalog Setup

4. Order and Contract Processing

5. Price Determination and ATP

Check

6. Additional E-Selling Scenarios

7. E-Marketing

 

Page 245: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 245/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-2

SAP AG2004

Additional E-Selling Scenarios

Selling via eBay

Interactive Selling and Guided Selling

Live Web Collaboration

 

Page 246: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 246/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-3

SAP AG2004

Additional E-Selling Scenarios: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit you will be able to

explain the functionality of:

Selling via eBay

Interactive Selling Guided Selling

Live Web Collaboration

 

Page 247: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 247/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-4

SAP AG2004

Additional E-Selling Scenarios I

Selling via eBay

Interactive Selling and Guided Selling

Live Web Collaboration

 

Page 248: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 248/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-5

SAP AG2004

Web Auctions – Selling via eBay

* with Content Edition 2004

Execute Internet auctions to sell your excess inventory and

remarket idle assets by leveraging online communities

Selling via eBay

Complete auction-to-cash process

Create and manage listings on eBay while leveraging

existing order management, fulfillment, and financial processes

Full Web auction administration and monitoring of listings

published on ebay.com

Seamless integration of SAP R/3 and SAP CRM * with

the world’s largest online marketplace

 

New – Selling via eBay

  SAP and eBay have joined together to address the need for a cost-effective remarketing solution (for

example, idle assets). The result is an integrated solution that is easy to use, low in cost, and is designed

to deliver a rapid return on investment.

  Using their existing SAP business solutions, SAP customers will be able to extend their market reach

and customer base to generate additional cash flow by using the world's largest online marketplace.

  Web Auctions, in mySAP CRM, supports the complete auction-to-cash process, allowing companies to

sell, for example, excess inventory, and to remarket assets on the eBay online marketplace.

  Web Auctions trigger order management processes once an item is purchased, and uses existing order

fulfillment and financial processes. Web Auctions includes an integrated auction management system

that automatically schedules eBay listings, aggregates product data, and generates and manages listings

on the eBay marketplace. Web Auctions uses eBay's application programming interfaces (APIs) toconnect to eBay's online services, and provide the integration and tight harmonization of data from SAP

R/3 and SAP CRM to the eBay marketplace.

  SAP CRM integration planned with Content Edition 2004.

Page 249: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 249/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-6

SAP AG2004

Overall Process: Role Side

22

11

33

Browse eBay

and place bid

Auction Seller creates

and publishes listing

Monitor and/or

close auction

Receive notification

and check out44

Order creation,

fulfillment, and

cash collection

55

Consumer 

Seller 

Seller 

Consumer 

Seller 

 

  The auction administrator logs onto the Auction Administration cockpit. He looks at the products

available for auctions, and decides the time is right to liquidate the laptops from the prior product line.He selects a product, creates a listing with the appropriate information, and publishes it on eBay.

  A consumer browses the eBay site, and performs a search to find a good deal on a laptop. The consumer

finds the laptop offered by the seller and places a bid on the laptop that exceeds the reserve price.

  The Auction Administrator monitors the auction and, if he finds the highest bid exceeded his

expectations, he could also close the auction.

  Once the auction is closed, consumer receives an e-mail from eBay, informing her that she has won.

She follows the link in the e-mail, and is brought to the check-out page. The consumer enters her

delivery address and credit card information, and checks out. She is presented with an order number for

confirmation.

Page 250: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 250/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-7

SAP AG2004

Use Case Administrator Use Case Administrator 

Process – Administration

Administration & Set-Up

Define users

Schedule tasks

Configure SAP parameters

Define auction profiles

Auction Administration

General Administration

 

Page 251: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 251/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-8

SAP AG2004

UseUse CaseCase Key Seller Key Seller 

Product Identification

& Preparation

Auction

Process

Post-Auction

Processing

Process – Auction Creation/Handling

Identify products

Staging products

Create auction

Publish to eBay Create Reservation

Buyer Bids on eBay

 Auction Close

Receive winner notification

Check-out

Create Customer  Create Order 

Deliver Product

Process Payment

Financial reconciliation

 

Page 252: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 252/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-9

SAP AG2004

Overall Process: Selling via eBay

Administration & Set-Up

Define users

Schedule tasks

Configure SAP parameters

Define auction profiles

Product Identification

& Preparation

Auction

Process

Post-Auction

Processing

Identify products

Staging products

Create auction

Publish to eBay

Create Reservation

Buyer Bids on eBay

 Auction Close

Receive winner notification

Check-out

Create Customer 

Create Order 

Deliver Product

Process Payment

Financial reconciliation

Monitor On-going Auctions

Analyze Auction Results

Monitor & Analyze Auctions

 

Page 253: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 253/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-10

SAP AG2004

Result of Action Creation – Listing on eBay

Example of the Listing published onto eBay

 

Page 254: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 254/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-11

SAP AG2004

Additional E-Selling Scenarios II

Selling via eBay

Interactive Selling and Guided

Selling

Live Web Collaboration

 

Page 255: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 255/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-12

SAP AG2004

Interactive Selling and Guided Selling

Interactive Selling of configurable products

Complete configure-to-order scenarios

Self-service to customize products on the Web

Powerful configuration engine for simple and complex

products

Single point of maintenance:

model once – configure everywhere

Dynamic product visualization

Guided Selling

Supports customers in the process of finding,

selecting and ordering the right products

Guide customers through a simulated question-and-

answer session

Ensures a personalized online buying experience

 

Page 256: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 256/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-13

SAP AG2004

Guided Selling

"I need a new monitor

for my computer. It

doesn't have to be the

latest model, though." 

Guided Selling aims at supporting customers in the

process of finding selecting and ordering products

Guided Selling helps customers to

easily identify relevant information

compare alternatives

configure products

Guided Selling helps companies to collect information about their customers

create customer loyalty

increase revenue across all sales channels

 

Page 257: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 257/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-14

SAP AG2004

People-centric Internet Sales: Guided Selling

Question 1Predefined questions

lead customers to the

products they are

looking for without

having to browse

through the catalog

Simulated individual face-

to-face sales talk: ask

questions get answers

Effective product search

and product

recommendation through

a dialog with the customer 

Simplified product

selection process for the

customer especially for

complex products

Question 2

Result 1

 

  Predefined questions direct customers to the products that they are looking for.

  No navigation through the product catalog is required

  Simulated dialog between the customer and the vendor

  Guided Selling as enhanced product search

  Simplified product selection for particularly complex products

Page 258: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 258/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-15

SAP AG2004

Set-up Intelligent Product Advisor (IPA)

CM

Product

Catalog

Variants

1

XML

Export

Product catalog

variants are

exported via

the XML export

Export

File

Server 

XML Files

Var_1.xml

Var_2.xml

Var…

2 3

XML files are parsed

and imported into

the Knowledge Base

Editor; KB instancesare created

Knowledge

Base

Editor 

Parse

4

Knowledge Base

is created withthe Knowledge

Base Editor KB_1

KB_2

KB…

Web Shop Knowledge Base

gets published

and is available

in the Web Shop

Publish

Guided SellingWhat would you like

to use the computerfor?

a) Office work

b) Graphic design

c) Fun

d) Professional

 

  Only catalog variants can be exported.

  The destination of the XML files is usually a server of the Web Middleware (J2EE Engine, TREX, IPC,

and so on).

  Knowledge Bases are created with the Knowledge Base Editor.

  The KB gets published by overwriting the foreground instance with the newly created background

instance.

  IPA is a third party software component for questions-answering modeling. It is included in the SAP

license.

Page 259: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 259/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-16

SAP AG2004

Product Configuration Made Easy with IPC

Check

Status

Search

Order 

Configure

Buying via Internet SalesBuying via Internet Sales

Customer 

SAP Internet Pricing and

Configurator

Web-based product configurator 

Complete configure-to-order

scenario

Integrated with planning, availability,

order management, fulfillment, service,

billing, financials

Interactive sales configuration

Simple and complex products

Dynamic pricing

User guidance

Product modeling

Fully integrated with Master Data

Maintenance

 

Page 260: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 260/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-17

SAP AG2004

Additional E-Selling Scenarios III

Selling via eBay

Interactive Selling and Guided Selling

Live Web Collaboration

 

With CRM 4.0 the functionality of Live Web Collaboration was extended by the following features:

  Replay of Customer Sessions

  Integration to IC Web Client

  Live Customer Support communication channels supported by the IC Web Client:

  E-mail

  Chat

  Co-browsing (project-based)

Page 261: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 261/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-18

SAP AG2004

Live Customer Support

Enables real-time communication between the

online customer and a live customer service

representative

Immediate personal assistance at your fingertips

Customers can choose their preferred

communication method

Chat sessions with optional co-browsing

Call-me-back requests

E-mail

Routing to the right agent at the right time

Agents are provided with context information to bestserve the customer 

 

  Immediate personal assistance

  Navigational assistance – for lost customers on the site

  Information requests – for product specifications and inquiries

  Sales assistance – for closing the sale and cross-selling products

  Administrative help – for tasks such as password resets

  Various technologies are enabled

  Chat sessions, with file transfers, push-pages, and co-browsing

  Call-me-back requests, using the telephone or Internet telephony

  E-mail for less time-sensitive questions

Page 262: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 262/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-19

SAP AG2004

The Customer Chooses the Communication Method

Customer in the Web Shop requests assistance

from an agent in the Interaction Center to obtain

information to make a purchasing decision

E-mail

Form used on site – no local e-mail is required

Supported with IC WebClient and IC WinClient

Chat

Text chat between customer and agent

Supported with IC WebClient and IC WinClient

Call back request

Customer asks a question, requests a call-back

Call-back can occur via telephone or voice-over IP

Supported with IC WinClient only

Co-Browsing *

Customer and agent share the browser session

* third party software is required

 

Page 263: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 263/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-20

SAP AG2004

Benefits of Live Customer Support

For Your Business

Enhanced service level

Get the right agent at the right time

Overcome self-service limitations through live

interaction to retain customers

For Your Customer

Customer can choose the best way to resolve an

issue online

Provide a human touch on the Internet

Increased customer satisfaction due to

personalized responses

 

Page 264: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 264/416

© SAP AG CR800 6-21

SAP AG2004

Additional E-Selling Scenarios: Unit Summary

You are now able to explain the functionality of:

Selling via eBay

Interactive Selling Guided Selling

Live Web Collaboration

 

Page 265: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 265/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-1

SAP AG2004

E-Marketing

8. E-Servicea) Solution Search

b) Service Request Management

c) Complaints and Returns Managementin E-Commerce

9. E-Analytics

Appendix

Units

1. Foundation and Architecture

2. Shop and User Management

3. Catalog Setup

4. Order and Contract Processing

5. Price Determination and ATP

Check

6. Additional E-Selling Scenarios

7. E-Marketing

 

Page 266: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 266/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-2

SAP AG2004

E-Marketing

Global Product Recommendations

Personalized Product Recommendations

Accessories

Cross- Down- and Upselling

 

   New with CRM 4.0: An anonymous visitor gets personalized product proposals for Cross, Down- andUpselling in the Web shop. The visitor just has to maintain marketing attributes (for example, interest,

income, hobbies, and so on). These attributes are saved as a cookie. The next time the visitor visits the

Web shop, he is identified by the cookie and product proposals are available.

  A report is available to delete unknown user data for performance reasons: Deletion report for unknown

users that are no longer required (Marketing Tools  Expert Tools  underneath the folder Product

 proposals).

Page 267: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 267/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-3

SAP AG2004

E-Marketing: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit you will be able to:

Outline the marketing functions used in E-Commerce

Generate personal and global product recommendations

(bestsellers) in a Web shop

Customize accessories, cross-selling, and up-selling for the

Web shop

 

Page 268: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 268/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-4

SAP AG2004

E-Marketing I

Global Product Recommendations

Personalized Product Recommendations

Accessories

Cross- Down- and Upselling

 

  The E-Marketing functionality above is part of the mySAP CRM Marketing functionality.

  The marketing functions of mySAP CRM E-Marketing help companies to increase sales to their

 business partners by means of product recommendations.

  The options for additional sales generation are:

  Offer products on the basis of sales figures (bestsellers)

  Offer higher-value alternative products (up-selling)

  Offer similar products (cross-selling)

  Offer accessories

Page 269: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 269/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-5

SAP AG2004

Shop Management

Web shop

Global Product Recommendation

Special offers in our shop

Display Global Product Recommendation

General Information Catalog Order  Marketing

Target Group for ProductRecommendation *

Global Product Recommendation

 

  With global product recommendations you can offer the bestseller of the entire Web shop to all of the

customers that visit your Web shop, independent of particular target groups.

  The Target group for Product Recommendation  field is used in the Web shop to offer products

(bestsellers), which are displayed for all consumers/customers.

  To enable selective marketing, business partners are divided up into different target groups. The target

groups are maintained in CRM Marketing

  By definition, the members of a target group have attributes in common. In the case of global product

recommendations a common interest in visiting the Web shop (thus global target group).

  Every visitor to the shop is indirectly assigned to this target group.

  A universal target group is used as a reference to propose and present certain products in the form of a

top n product list. When target groups are used for personalized marketing functions, the shop visitor isdirectly assigned to one or more target groups.

Page 270: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 270/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-6

SAP AG2004

Set Up of Global Product Recommendations

Create a global target group1

2

3

Assign target group together with products to a Top n list

Assign the global target group to the Web shop

 

  Creation of a global target group:

  Start the segment builder (TX: CRMD_MKTSEG)

  Create a profile set with the type Product Proposal (in the heading New Profile Set appears).

  With your mouse click right in the central area and choose Create target group.

  Right click at the new target group (choose Target Group Properties) and define a useful description,

 because this is the ID, which has to be placed in the Web shop profile.

  Save.

  Just create an empty target group, as the assignment of business partner is done indirectly.

  For the definition of the Top n list perform the following steps:

  Start the maintenance of the TOP-N-Lists (TX: CRMD_PPR_TOPN)

  Create a new Top n List, define ID and Description

  Set the status to active

  Assign in the business partner area your target group (reference type: marketing segments)

  Define in the product area the products (reference type: product)

Page 271: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 271/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-7

SAP AG2004

Top n List Maintenance

profile set, profile,

target group

Top n lists can be defined for:

Profile sets

Profiles

Target groups

 

  Top n lists are a combination of business partners and products which is valid for a specific period of

time.

  A top n list consists of information entered on two levels: a header containing mainly administrative

information (description, status – see next slide) and one or more top n items containing the actual

 business partner, product and time stamp combination.

  Top n lists are stored and maintained in product partner ranges (PPR) structures.

  One universal target group can be part of several top-n-lists.

  One Top n list can have several target groups.

   New with CRM 4.0: If no top N lists have been maintained for a Web shop, the system does not

 propose any top N lists.

Page 272: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 272/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-8

SAP AG2004

Assignment of Products to Top n List

Top n List

Dynamic ApproachDynamic Approach

ProductsProducts from BWfrom BW Products maintainedProducts maintained

manuallymanually

SAP CRM System

Static ApproachStatic Approach

SAP

Business Warehouse

SAP

Business Warehouse

Sales statistics

 

  Products within a top n list can either:

  Be determined dynamically from the SAP Business Information Warehouse (BW) system using data

mining techniques (for example, based on sales data)

  Assigned manually within the top n maintenance

  In case of combination of the two approaches no product will be shown twice, if it is part of both lists.

  To call up a (dynamic) top n list from the BW, a report has to be scheduled (CRMD_TOPNSEL).

Page 273: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 273/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-9

SAP AG2004

Global Product Recommendations

After it has been configured, the product list is still emptyAfter it has been configured, the product list is still emptyAfter it has been configured, the product list is still empty

Possible Explanations

Target group has not been assigned to the Web shop

Top n list was not activated

No products have been assigned to the top n lists of the target

groups

Products are not contained in the product catalog/have not beenreplicated to the index server (TREX)

Typical Problems:

 

Page 274: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 274/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-10

SAP AG2004

E-Marketing II

Bestsellers

Personalized Product Recommendations

Accessories

Cross- Down and Upselling

 

Page 275: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 275/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-11

SAP AG2004

Web shop

Personalized Product Recommendation

Shop Management

Display Global Product Recommendation

General Information Catalog Order  Marketing

Target Group for ProductRecommendation *

Global Product RecommendationPersonalized Product Recommendation

Display Personalized Product Recommendation

Characteristic Group *

You can select or specify exactly one value

Office

MultimediaInternet

You can select or specify exactly one value

Beginner

Advanced

Expert

Here you can change, delete or supplement entries in

your current customer profile

 Area of Usage

User Group

Define your profile

Personalized Product Recommendations

 

  Personalized product recommendations are supported in B2B and B2C Web shops. To be able to offer

 product recommendations, a characteristic group has to be assigned to a Web shop.

  This characteristic group is displayed in the Web shop as a questionnaire with marketing attributes.

These marketing attributes are saved as a personal profile in the business partner master and are the

 basis for personalized product recommendations.

  Each customer can create a personal profile in the Web shop. This profile is used to determine the target

group(s) of a customer.

  A target group describes a group of existing or potential business partners that have certain attributes in

common (such as age, occupation, hobbies).

Page 276: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 276/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-12

SAP AG2004

Set Up Personalized Product Recommendations

Define marketing attributes (age, profession ...)1

2

3

Create attribute set (questionnaire) and assign attributes

Assign attribute set (characteristic group) to Web shop

Create profile sets, profiles and target groups based

on attribute set, InfoSets and/or BW cubes4

5

6

Schedule reports for segmentation

Create top n list and assign

• Products (manually or via BW query)• Profile sets, profiles and/or target groups

• Web shop

 

  How to define Target Groups:

  In an attribute list a set of attributes have to be defined, which are accessible in the segment builder.

Every attribute refers to a data source. So you are able to define one marketing segment on the basis

of attribute sets, queries of the BW or infosets. Because E-Commerce only supports profile sets of the

type product proposal, also the attribute list has to be defined with this category. Then the single

values of the attributes has to be defined as filter.

  Create a target group within the segment builder (Tx: CRMD_MKTSEG): Create a profile set with

the type Product Proposal. Change the properties of the profile set by clicking right on the

 background and choose Attributes of Profile Set. Now select the attribute list in left part and every

defined attribute will appear. Than drag and drop one of the defined filters to the profile set area.

Click right at the profile and select create target group. Now you can see two symbols, one for the

 profile and a smaller one for the target group.

  If you enter the segment builder again later and you just open the same target group you will see the

 business partner of the last selection. If you want to refresh the selection just create the target group

again (right click). Normally the selection takes place regularly. This is done via a job, which can

only be started for the profile set (Report CRM_MKTTG_SET_CREATE_TG, but start it in the

segment builder!).

  To assign business partners to target groups automatically, a report has to be scheduled

(CRMD_TGBP).

  Each business partner can belong to one or more target groups.

Page 277: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 277/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-13

SAP AG2004

Assignment of Business Partners to Target Groups

Web shop

customer

creates a

profile in the

Web shop

Define your profile

You can select or specify exactly one value

Office

Multimedia

Internet

You can select or specify exactly one value

Beginner

Advanced

Expert

Here you can change, delete or supplement entries in

your current customer profile

 Area of Usage

User Group

Define your profile

Web shop customers see product

recommendations …

Immediately, if they are based ona profile and/or 

After the next target group selection, if they are based on a target

group

Web

shop

 

  As there is no online assignment of business partners to target groups, a business partner, who is

creating or changing his profile in the Web shop, will not get assigned to a target group immediately.This will happen after the next target group selection.

  To show the Web shop customer product recommendations immediately you have to assign profiles

(and not target groups) to the top n list.

Page 278: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 278/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-14

SAP AG2004

Personalized Product Recommendations

After it has been configured, the product list is still emptyAfter it has been configured, the product list is still emptyAfter it has been configured, the product list is still empty

Possible Explanations

The Web shop visitor has not been assigned to a target group

and does not have any marketing attributes

No products have been assigned to the top n list

Products are not contained in the product catalog/were not

transferred to the IMS during the replication

Typical Problems:

 

Page 279: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 279/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-15

SAP AG2004

E-Marketing III

Global Product Recommendations

Personalized Product Recommendations

Accessories

Cross- Up- and Downselling

 

Page 280: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 280/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-16

SAP AG2004

Accessories are maintained in the product master

(button: relationships)

Web Shop

Accessories

Relationships

Accessories are displayed in the product list, product detail,

and shopping basket

 

  You need to set the flag Display Cross-, Up-Selling and Accessories Method Schema in the Shop

Management. Additionally, you have to assign a method schema (details later).

  Accessories are visible for all Web shop visitors.

  Catalog replication is needed.

Page 281: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 281/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-17

SAP AG2004

The accessories in the item list of the catalog

areas are displayed in catalog maintenance

As soon as the leading product is assigned to the product catalog, the

accessories are available for the product catalogHandling is different at catalog areas with automatic/manual product

assignment

During the replication, accessories are also stored in the IMS

Accessories within the Product Catalog

 

  Please note that the handling of accessories is different at catalog areas with automatic product

assignment than at those with manual product assignment.

  Areas with automatic product assignment:

  All the assigned accessories products are transferred automatically to the product catalog as

accessories and replicated.

  Areas with manual product assignment:

  All the assigned accessories products are available in product catalog maintenance. The catalog

 processor can choose the required accessories.

Page 282: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 282/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-18

SAP AG2004

E-Marketing IV

Global Product Recommendations

Personalized Product Recommendations

Accessories

Cross- Up- and Downselling

 

Page 283: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 283/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-19

SAP AG2004

Exchange products in the shopping basket

Up-Selling 

Cross-, Up-, and Down-Selling

Cross-Selling 

Cross Selling

For a given product related

products are proposed.

Up-Selling

For a particular product you

can specify that other, more

expensive products,

are proposed as alternatives.

Down-Selling

In some cases, you may wish

to suggest a less expensiveproduct as an alternative.

 

  Cross-Selling should also support your sales efforts, by offering customers additional products

alongside the one they have selected. These recommendations should arouse the interest of customersand encourage them to buy further products.

  Up-Selling should support your sales efforts, by offering customers alternative products of higher value,

alongside the one they have selected. These recommendations should arouse the interest of customers

and encourage them to buy the more expensive products as an alternative.

  Benefits of down-selling: If business partners have added various items to their shopping basket in an

online store and find that they have exceeded their budget, they may remove one or more items. Down-

selling aims to maximize sales by suggesting cheaper products as an alternative to these items.

Page 284: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 284/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-20

SAP AG2004

Different CUDA in the Shopping Basket

Display Cross-, Up-Selling and Accessories

General Information Catalog Order  Marketing

Target Group for ProductRecommendation *

Global Product RecommendationCross-, Up-Selling and Accessories

Display Cross-, Up-Selling and Accessories

Method Schema *Target Group for Global Cross-/Up-Selling *

Personalized Cross-/Up-Selling

General Information Catalog Order  Marketing

Cross-, Up-Selling and AccessoriesDisplay Cross-, Up-Selling and Accessories

Method Schema *

... and personalized cross-,

up- and down-selling.

Note: Accessories are

always universal

Personalized Cross-/Up-Selling

Standard Target Group *

In CRM E-Commerce the

Web shop administrator 

can choose between

universal cross-, up- and

down-selling ...

 

Page 285: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 285/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-21

SAP AG2004

Set Up Universal Cross-, Up- and Down-Selling

Create a global target groupCreate a global target group11

22

33

44

Create a Web shopCreate a Web shop

Define product association rules for global target groupsDefine product association rules for global target groups

Assign the global target group to the Web shopAssign the global target group to the Web shop

   S   t  e  p   1  :   C  r  e  a   t  e   t  a  r  g  e   t

  g  r  o  u  p  s

   S

   t  e  p   2

Create product relationship for target group

 

  With CRM 4.0 it is possible to create global CUD without a extra global target group. Therefore, you

can use the Type of Marketing Segment 01 Global Rule. But currently the Web Shop still require aglobal target group.

  CUDA = Cross – Up – Down Selling and Accessories

  For personalized cross-, up- and down-selling not the global target group is taken into account, but the

target groups the customer is assigned to. In addition for these target groups product association rules

need to be defined.

Page 286: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 286/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-22

SAP AG2004

Define Product Association Rules

Two types of association rules

Cross-Selling: Association rules are specified in terms of leading

product(s) and dependent product(s)

Up-/Down-Selling: Association rules are specified in terms of the

relationships between products

Activation: Rules has to be activated

Target group PC-Buyer  

Leading products

Dependent products

HT-1002 

HT-1001

Target group PC-Buyer Seq. Ranking

Leading products

Dependent products

HT-1021 0 1

HT-1001 0 2  

 

  Rules can be defined for the following marketing definitions:

  Target Groups

  Profiles

  Global

  For Up-/Down-Selling rules the ranking can be compiled automatically:

  IMG: CRM Marketing  Product Proposal  Define Procedure for Creating a Ranking Value

  You have two options:

1. No procedure/manual procedure

-  The ranking value is not automatically determined. When maintaining up or down-selling rules,

you will need to enter the ranking value manually.

2. Sales price procedure

-  The products within the association rule are sorted according to their sales price, with the cheapest

 product having the ranking value 1, the next cheapest product the value 2, and so on.

Page 287: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 287/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-23

SAP AG2004

Personalized Product Proposals for “Visitor”

Product proposals at first visit

The unknown visitor enters web-shop and maintains marketing

attributes. These attributes are saved with a special key(as a cookie).

Product proposals at repeated visit

Visitor is identified by the cookie, product proposals are available.

The visitor can change his attribute values, changes are saved.

Unknown user is registered

User decided to register. Marketing attribute values can be passed

to the new created customer.

 

  This flag is used to control whether unknown Internet users should be offered personal

recommendations. For this, unknown users have to maintain their marketing profile. Profile data issaved with a generated ID. The ID that is created is then saved in a cookie so that users do not have to

maintain their profile again when they next visit.

  At present, only CUA recommendations can be offered for unknown users.

  For performance reasons the unknown user data should be deleted regularly if the visitor does not

change his data over a defined period.

  There is a report for deletion:

Marketing Marketing  Tools

 Deletion report for unknown users that are no longer required

Page 288: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 288/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-24

SAP AG2004

Defines how cross-selling/up-selling/down-selling

products, and accessories are determined in the shopping

basket

Determines how product proposals are generated and

combined

Each method schema can contain one or more methods, as

required

The system reads the method schema and runs through

the methods in the order listed

Define a Method Schema

 

  You want to define a method schema that provides a list of top n products plus accessories for these

 products.

  You first enter the method that provides a list of top n products, followed by the function module that

determines the accessories. Since you want to combine the products that are determined using these

methods, you define the combination type as Add result. (Path in Customizing: Customer Relationship

Management ¨ Marketing ¨ Product Proposal ¨ Create Method Schema)

  For performance issues regarding method schema and profile sets, please notice SAP Note: 511447.

Page 289: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 289/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-25

SAP AG2004

CUDA in Shopping Basket: Business Logic

shop‘spersonalized

CUD check-boxon ?

use shop‘s globalCU target group to

determinecross-sellung/up-selling

relations

scenario ?

result

empty?

use shop‘s defaultCUD target group

to determine cross-

, up- and down-selling relations

customer 

logged-inas yet ?

use customer‘s

target group(s) todeterminecross-sellung/up-selling

relations

use contactperson‘s target

group(s) todetermine cross-sellung/up-selling

relations

resultempty?

use sold-topartner‘s target

group(s) to

determine cross-,up- and down-selling relations

no yes

B2C B2B

yes

no

yes

 

Page 290: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 290/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-26

SAP AG2004

Cross-, Up- and Down-Selling and Accessories

No CUDA products are displayed initiallyNo CUDA products are displayed initiallyNo CUDA products are displayed initially

Possible Explanations

No association rules have been maintained for the products in the

shopping basket

No association rules have been maintained for the chosen target

group

Rule is not activated

Cross-selling rules have been maintained with more than one

leading product

The CUDA product is not contained in the product catalog

Typical Problems:

 

Page 291: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 291/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-27

SAP AG2004

Marketing Functions: Summary

   M

  a  r   k  e   t   i  n  g   F  u  n  c   t   i  o  n  s

   G  e  n  e  r  a   l   M  a  r   k  e   t   i  n  g

   F  u  n  c   t   i  o  n  s

   (  u  n   i  v  e  r  s  a   l  r  e  c  o  m  m  e  n   d  a   t   i  o  n  s   )

Accessories

Up-, Down-Selling

Cross-Selling

   G   l  o   b  a   l

   R  e  c  o  m  m  e  n   d  a   t   i  o  n  s

  s   t  a   t   i  c

   d  y  n  a  m   i  c

   P  r  o   d  u  c   t

   P  e  r  s  o  n

  a   l   i  z  e   d   P  r  o   d  u  c   t

   R  e  c  o  m  m  e  n   d  a   t   i  o  n  s

  s   t  a   t   i  c

   d  y  n  a  m   i  c

   O  n  e   t  o   O  n  e   M  a  r   k  e   t   i  n  g

   (  p  e  r  s  o  n  a   l   i  z  e   d  r  e  c  o  m  m  e  n   d  a   t   i  o  n  s   )

Cross-Selling

Up-, Down-Selling

 

Page 292: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 292/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-28

SAP AG2004

E-Marketing: Unit Summary

You are now able to:

Outline the marketing functions used in E-Selling

Generate personal and global product recommendations

(bestsellers) in a Web shop

Customize accessories, cross-selling, down and up-selling for the

Web shop

 

Page 293: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 293/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-29

Exercises

Topic: Marketing Functions

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:

•  Create bestsellers and personalized product recommendations.

•  Create target groups.

•  Create top n product lists.

•  Create product association rules for cross-selling and up-selling products.

1-1 IDES Inc. would like to offer bestsellers and personalized product recommendations

in its Web shop. Your task is to extend the B2C Web shop to include marketingfunctions. First you will offer global product recommendations (bestsellers) that are

valid for all consumers of your Web shop. You will then offer personalized product

recommendations in the Web shop.

1-1-1 Call up your Web shop ZB2CSHOP## .

URL: 

http://<webserver:port>/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESC  RM80X  

Take a look at the fields for product recommendations.

These fields are relevant for controlling marketing functions. In the next steps

you are going to fill these fields step by step.

1-1-2 To offer global product recommendations, you first have to maintain a globaltarget group to address all customers in your B2C Web shop.

SAPmenu  →   Marketing →  Segmentation of Business Partners →  Marketing

Segments →  Segment Builder

Create a target group.

 Name: Global Target Group ##  

Save your target group.

Page 294: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 294/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-30

1-1-3 The second step is to create a permanent top n list.

SAPmenu →  Marketing →  Product Proposals →  Maintain Top n Products  

Create a top n list called ZTOPN_##  with the description Top n List 01 for group ## .

Add products HT-1040  and  HT-1050 and the target group to your top n list.

Save your top n list.

1-1-4 Enter the global target group in the profile for your B2C Web shop.

URL: 

http://<webserver:port>/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESC  RM80X  

Log on with your CRM user and choose Existing Shops.

Search for shop ZB2CSHOP##  and choose Change.

Target group: Global Target Group ##

Save your changes.

1-1-5 To display your top n list in the B2C Web shop, you have to maintain therelevant products in the product catalog.

Call up your product catalog ZB2CCAT## .

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCR

 M80X

Log on with your CRM user and select your catalog. 

Maintain products HT-1040, HT-1050 and  HT-1055  in the (manual) catalog

area Scanners .

Activate the products and the corresponding catalog area and save your entries.

Carry out an update replication for your product catalog to the index server.

Choose Replication in the second level navigation bar → Update Replication

Product Catalog: ZB2CCAT##

Page 295: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 295/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-31

1-1-6 Look at the results. Call up the Web shop and check whether the two products

are listed in your Web shop as bestsellers.

Start your browser and call up the B2C scenario.

URL:http://<webserver:port>/b2c/b2c/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

Choose your Web shop ZB2CSHOP## .

1-1-7 Now maintain the personal product recommendations. Create an Attribute Set  and assign it to your B2C Web shop. Before you can create this Attribute Set ,

you have to create attributes with a defined value range.

SAPmenu →   Marketing →  Segmentation of Business Partners →  Marketing

 Attributes →  Maintain Attributes

Create two attributes.Attribute:  Z##_HOBBIES  

Description: Your hobbies  Type: Character format  

 Number of chars/digits: 30 

Valuation:  Multiple values 

Maintain the following attributes on the Values tab page:Attribute value: CookingDescription:  I like cooking

Attribute value:  Bowling  

Description:  I like bowling  

Save your entries.Attribute:  Z##_COLOR

Description: Your preferred colors Type: Character format  

 Number of characters: 30

Maintain the following attributes on the Values tab page:

Attribute value: YellowDescription:  Preferred color yellow 

Attribute value:  Red

Description:  Preferred color red  

Attribute value:  Blue Description: Preferred color blue

Save your entries.

Page 296: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 296/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-32

1-1-8 Create the Attribute Set Z##_AS . 

SAPmenu →  Marketing →  Segmentation of Business Partners →  Marketing

 Attributes →  Maintain Attribute Sets

Attribute Set:  Z##_AS  

Description:  Attribute Set for group ##

To this Attribute Set , assign your attributes:

Attribute:  Z##_HOBBIES  

Attribute:  Z##_COLOR  

Save your entries.

1-1-9 Choose this Attribute Set  in the corresponding field in your Web shop.

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCR

 M80X  

Log on with your CRM user and choose Existing Shops.

Search for shop ZB2CSHOP##  and choose Change.

Attribute Set:  Z##_AS  

Save your entries.

1-1-10 Once you have created an Attribute Set  and assigned it to your Web shop,visitors to the Web shop can use this set as a basis to create their own customer

 profiles.

Call up the Web shop with the B2C user you created in Unit 2 and maintain the

customer profile.

Start your browser and call up the B2C scenario.

URL:http://<webserver:port>/b2c/b2c/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

Select your Web shop ZB2CSHOP## , log on with your user, and maintain a

customer profile.

In the next exercise, you will create a target group for customers who prefer

yellow products. Set the preferred color in the customer profile to yellow.

Save your customer profile.

Page 297: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 297/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-33

1-1-11 To enable customers to receive personalized product recommendations,

customers must be assigned to a target group.

You will create a target group for customers who are interested in yellow products.

Maintain a data source for the segment builder.

SAPmenu →   Marketing →  Segmentation of Business Partners →  Marketing

Segments →  Maintain Data Sources for Segment Builder

First create your data source Z##_AS  with type  Attribute Set , then create an

attribute list (description: Attribute List group ## ) with category and segmenttype product proposal  and assign your new  Attribute List  as data source.

Save your entries.

Create a specific target group and assign your Business Partner to it. (Your

Business Partner has chosen Preferred color yellow.)

SAPmenu →   Marketing →  Segmentation of Business Partners →  Marketing

Segments →  Segment Builder  

1-1-12 Create a top n list called ZTOPN_##_2  with the description TOP n List 2 for group ## . Add product HT-1055 to this list. Follow the same procedure as

 before, but in the field Target group  maintain your new specific Target Group

(Preferred color yellow).

1-1-13 Look at the results. Call up the Web shop and check whether your product HT-

1055 appears as the personalized product recommendation.

Start your browser and call up the B2C scenario.

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/b2c/b2c/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

Select your Web shop ZB2CSHOP##, log on with your user and look at the personalized recommendations.

Page 298: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 298/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-34

Page 299: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 299/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-35

Topic: Marketing Functions: Up/Down-Selling

1-2 You would like to integrate up/down-selling functionality in your Web shop. To do so,you are going to specify an up/down-selling relationship between various products.

1-2-1 The printer HT-1050 is a product that you would like to propose as a higher-

value alternative to the printer HT-1055. Create the product association rule forthe universal target group.

SAPmenu →  Marketing →  Product Proposals →  Maintain Cross- /Up-

 /Down-Selling RulesTarget group: Global Target Group ##  Description:  Association Rule for Group ##

Up-/Down-Selling Products

Product:  HT-1055 

Rank: 1 Product:  HT-1050 

Rank: 2

Activate the rule and save your entries.

1-2-2 To display this relationship on the Web, you need to update your Web shop.

Go to your Web shop ZB2CSHOP## .

URL: 

http://<webserver:port>/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESC 

 RM80X  

Log on with your CRM user and choose Existing Shops.

Search for shop ZB2CSHOP##  and choose Change.

Entry:Method schema: 000006Target group for global cross-/up-selling: Global Target Group ##

Save your entries.

Page 300: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 300/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-36

1-2-3 Call up your B2C Web shop. Add product HT-1055 to your shopping basket.

A higher-value alternative will be proposed for all the customers that add this

 product to their shopping baskets.

Start your browser and call up the B2C scenario.

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/b2c/b2c/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

Replace product HT-1055.

You can find this higher-value alternative as well in the product catalog via

 Alternatives next to product  HT-1055.

Page 301: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 301/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-37

Topic: Marketing Functions: Accessories

1-3 When customers add products to their shopping baskets, suitable accessories are proposed automatically.

1-3-1 Define accessories for product THT-00-## . Define an accessory relationship

 between products in the product master for this purpose.

SAPmenu →  Master Data   →   Product →  Maintain Products  

Select your product THT-00-##  and define product  HT-1092  as accessory.

Save your entries.

1-3-2 Carry out an update replication of your product catalog B2BCAT## .

1-3-3 Check the results in the Web shop B2BSHOP# #.

Start your browser and call up the B2B scenario.

URL: http://<webserver:port>/b2b/b2b/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

Page 302: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 302/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-38

Page 303: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 303/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-39

Solutions

Topic: Marketing Functions

1-1 IDES Inc. would like to offer bestsellers and personalized product recommendationsin its Web shop. Your task is to extend the B2C Web shop to include marketing

functions. First you will offer global product recommendations (bestsellers) that are

valid for all consumers of your Web shop. You will then offer personalized productrecommendations in the Web shop.

1-1-1 Call up your Web shop ZB2CSHOP## .URL: 

http://<webserver:port>/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESC 

 RM80X  

Take a look at the fields for product recommendations.

Choose Marketing .

These fields are relevant for controlling marketing functions. In the next stepsyou are going to fill these fields step by step.

1-1-2 To offer global product recommendations, you first have to maintain a globaltarget group to address all customers in your B2C Web shop.

SAPmenu  →   Marketing →  Segmentation of Business Partners →  Marketing

Segments →  Segment Builder

Create a target group. Name: Global Target Group ##

Choose Create Profile Set . Choose Product Proposal  and maintain in for

description Profile Set Group ##. Leave the field Master Group empty. Now

click with your right mouse in the central area and choose Create Target

Group. Click again with your right mouse on the new target group andchoose Target Group Properties. Maintain description Global Target Group

## and confirm your entry.  

Save your target group.

Page 304: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 304/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-40

1-1-3 The second step is to create a permanent top n list.

SAPmenu →  Marketing →  Product Proposals →  Maintain Top n Products  

Create a top n list called ZTOPN_##  with the description Top n List 01 for group ## .

Choose Create Top n List, enter ZTOPN_## in the ID field and Top n List

01 for group ## in the description field. 

Add products HT-1040  and  HT-1050 to your top n list.

On Item Level first maintain your ZB2CSHOP## in the field Shop, then on

tab Business Partner  maintain the description of your universal target

group with Type description Target group (Reference type has to be

 Marketing Segment ). On tab Product  maintain products HT-1040 and HT-

1050, both with Product Type  Material  (Reference type has to be product ).

On Header Level  set the Status of your list to Active.

Save your top n list.

1-1-4 Enter the global target group in the profile for your B2C Web shop.

URL: http://<webserver:port>/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESC 

 RM80X  

Log on with your CRM user and choose Existing Shops.

Search for shop ZB2CSHOP## and choose Change.

On tab Marketing  select Display Global Product Recommendation and

maintain your global target group.

Target group: Global Target Group ##  

Save your changes.

Select Save.

1-1-5 To display your top n list in the B2C Web shop, you have to maintain the

relevant products in the product catalog.

Call up your product catalog ZB2CCAT## .

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/webcatadmin/catadm/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCR M80X

Log on with your CRM user and select your catalog. 

Choose Change.

Maintain products HT-1040, HT-1050 and  HT-1055  in the (manual) catalog

area Scanners.

Activate the products and the corresponding catalog area and save your entries.

Page 305: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 305/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-41

Choose Save.

Carry out an update replication for your product catalog to the index server.

Click on Replication in the second level navigation bar →  Update Replication

Product Catalog:  ZB2CCAT##  Select Update Replication. 

1-1-6 Look at the results. Call up the Web shop and check whether the two products

are listed in your Web shop as bestsellers.

Start your browser and call up the B2C scenario.

URL:http://<webserver:port>/b2c/b2c/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

Choose your Web shop ZB2CSHOP## .

1-1-7 Now maintain the personal product recommendations. Create an Attribute

Set  and assign it to your B2C Web shop. Before you can create this  AttributeSet , you have to create attributes with a defined value range.

SAPmenu →   Marketing →  Segmentation of Business Partners →  Marketing

 Attributes →  Maintain Attributes

Create two attributes.Attribute:  Z##_HOBBIES  

Choose Create. 

Description: Your hobbies  Type: Character format   Number of chars/digits: 30

Valuation:  Multiple values 

Maintain the following attributes on the Values tab page:

Attribute value: CookingDescription:  I like cooking  

Attribute value:  Bowling  

Description:  I like bowling  

Save your entries.

Attribute:  Z##_COLOR  Choose Create. Description: Your preferred colors 

Type: Character format   Number of characters: 30

Page 306: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 306/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-42

Maintain the following attributes on the Values tab page:

Attribute value: Yellow

Description:  Preferred color yellow Attribute value:  Red

Description:  Preferred color red  

Attribute value:  Blue 

Description:  Preferred color blue

Save your entries.

1-1-8 Create the Attribute Set Z##_AS . 

SAPmenu →  Marketing →  Segmentation of Business Partners →  Marketing

 Attributes →  Maintain Attribute Sets

Choose Create. 

Attribute Set:  Z##_AS  Description:  Attribute Set for group ##  

To this Attribute Set, assign your attributes:Attribute:  Z##_HOBBIES  

Attribute:  Z##_COLOR  

Save your entries.

1-1-9 Choose this Attribute Set  in the corresponding field in your Web shop.

URL:http://<webserver:port>/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCR

 M80X  

Log on with your CRM user and choose Existing Shops.

Search for shop ZB2CSHOP## and choose Change.

On tab Marketing  select Personalized Product Recommendation.

Attribute Set:  Z##_AS

For the field Characteristic Group select your Attribute set Z##_AS .

Save your entries.

Page 307: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 307/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-43

1-1-10 Once you have created an Attribute Set  and assigned it to your Web shop,

visitors to the Web shop can use this set as a basis to create their own customer

 profiles.

Call up the Web shop with the B2C user you created in Unit 2 and maintain thecustomer profile.

Start your browser and call up the B2C scenario.

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/b2c/b2c/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

Select your Web shop ZB2CSHOP## , log on with your user, and maintain a

customer profile.

Choose My Account  and then My Profile on the left side.

In the next exercise, you will create a target group for customers who preferyellow products. Set the preferred color in the customer profile to yellow.

Save your customer profile.

1-1-11 To enable customers to receive personalized product recommendations,

customers must be assigned to a target group.

You will create a target group for customers who are interested in yellow products.

Maintain a data source for the segment builder.

SAPmenu →   Marketing →  Segmentation of Business Partners →  Marketing

Segments →  Maintain Data Sources for Segment Builder

First create your data source Z##_AS  with type  Attribute Set , then create an

attribute list (description: Attribute List group ## ) with category and segmenttype product proposal  and assign your new  Attribute List  as data source.

Choose Create Data Source, choose Origin Type Attribute Set  and name

 Z##_AS . Save your entries. Now choose Create Attribute List , (if you don’t

see the button, choose Show/Hide Locator ) choose description Attribute List

 group ## and category and segment type Product Proposal . Select Enter

and choose Assign Data Source. Choose your Attribute Set for group ##.

Important: Check both boxes (hobbies and colors) which appear beneath

 Attribute Set for group ##.

Save your entries.

Create a specific target group and assign your Business Partner to it.( Your

 business partner has chosen Preferred color yellow.)

SAPmenu →   Marketing →  Segmentation of Business Partners →  Marketing

Segments →  Segment Builder  

Choose Profile Sets and double click on Profile Set Group XX.

Page 308: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 308/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-44

Select the attribute list Attribute List group ## beneath Attributes. All

attributes will appear. Now click with the right hand mouse on Your

 preferred colors and create a filter with value yellow. Then drag and drop

this filter to the profile set area. Click right on the new profile and choose

Create Target Group. Now you can see two symbols, one for the profile and

a smaller one for the target group. The digit 1 indicates that one Business

Partner is assigned to your Target Group. Click right at the profile/targetgroup and choose Open Target Group. Now you will see the assigned

business partner.

1-1-12 Create a top n list called ZTOPN_##_2  with the description TOP n List 2 for group ## . Add product HT-1055 to this list. Follow the same procedure as

 before, but in the field Target group  maintain your new specific Target Group

(preferred color yellow).

1-1-13 Look at the results. Call up the Web shop and check whether your product HT-1055 appears as the personalized product recommendation.

Start your browser and call up the B2C scenario.

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/b2c/b2c/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

Select your Web shop ZB2CSHOP## , log on with your user and have a look atthe personalized recommendations.

Page 309: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 309/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-45

Topic: Marketing Functions: Up/Down-Selling

1-2 You would like to integrate up/down-selling functionality in your Web shop. To do so,

you are going to specify an up/down-selling relationship between various products.

1-2-1 The printer HT-1050 is a product that you would like to propose as a higher-

value alternative to the printer HT-1055. Create the product association rule for

the universal target group.

SAPmenu→ 

 Marketing→ 

 Product Proposals→ 

 Maintain Cross- /Up- /Down-Selling Rules

Choose Up-Selling/Down-Selling Rule. 

Target group: Global Target Group ##  

Description:  Association Rule for Group ##  

Up-/Down-Selling Products

Product:  HT-1055 

Rank: 1

Product:  HT-1050Rank: 2

Activate the rule and save your entries.

Select Activate and then Save.

1-2-2 To display this relationship on the Web, you need to update your Web shop.

Go to your Web shop ZB2CSHOP## . 

URL: http://<webserver:port>/shopadmin/shopadmin/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESC 

 RM80X  

Log on with your CRM user and choose Existing Shops.Search for shop ZB2CSHOP## and choose Change.

On the tab Marketing, select Cross-, Up-Selling, and Accessories and

maintain the following data:

Entry:

Method schema: 000006Target group for global cross-/up-selling: Global Target Group ##  

Save your entries.

Page 310: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 310/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-46

1-2-3 Call up your B2C Web shop. Add product HT-1055 to your shopping basket.

A higher-value alternative will be proposed for all the customers that add this

 product to their shopping baskets.

Start your browser and call up the B2C scenario.

URL:

http://<webserver:port>/b2c/b2c/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

Replace product HT-1055.

You can find this higher-value alternative as well in the product catalog via

 Alternatives next to product  HT-1055.

Page 311: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 311/416

© SAP AG CR800 7-47

Topic: Marketing Functions: Accessories

1-3 When customers add products to their shopping baskets, suitable accessories should be proposed automatically.

1-3-1 Define accessories for product THT-00-## . Define an accessory relationship

 between products in the product master for this purpose.

SAPmenu →  Master Data   →   Product →  Maintain Products  

Select your product THT-00-##  and define product  HT-1092  as accessory.

Choose the Search tab page . Enter:

ID / Descr.: THT-00-## 

Choose Start . Select your product and select Relationships.

Enter the following values:

Product:  HT-1092 

Save your entries.

1-3-2 Carry out an update replication of your product catalog B2BCAT## .

1-3-3 Check the results in the Web shop B2BSHOP## .

Start your browser and call up the B2B scenario.

URL: http://<webserver:port>/b2b/b2b/init.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM80X  

Go to the area printers and choose Accessories next to product THT-00-##. 

Page 312: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 312/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-1

SAP AG2004

E-Service

8. E-Servicea) Solution Search

b) Service Request Management

c) Complaints and Returns Managementin E-Commerce

9. E-Analytics

Appendix

Units

1. Foundation and Architecture

2. Shop and User Management

3. Catalog Setup

4. Order and Contract Processing

5. Price Determination and ATP

Check

6. Additional E-Selling Scenarios

7. E-Marketing

 

Page 313: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 313/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-2

SAP AG2004

E-Service

E-Service Overview

Solution Search

Service Request Management

Complaints and Returns Management in

E-Commerce

 

Page 314: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 314/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-3

SAP AG2004

E-Service: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit you will be able to:

Describe the E-Service functions

Explain how to use E-Service

 

Page 315: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 315/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-4

SAP AG2004

E-Service I

E-Service Overview

Solution Search

Service Request Management

Complaints and Returns Management in

E-Commerce

 

Page 316: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 316/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-5

SAP AG2004

E-Service: Main Features

Extend enterprise knowledge information and

customer services to the Internet.

Provide customers with the ability to check order status, obtain

order tracking information, and research and resolve their own

product problems without involving a service representative.

Account Self-Service – Registration

Knowledge Management

FAQs by Product

Solution Search

Installed Base Management

Product Registration

Request Management

Complaints and Returns Management

 

  Account Self-Service: MySAP CRM provides customers with self-service for detailed account

information and maintenance tools. With mySAP CRM, customers can register for user accounts,update their personal account information, and monitor their interaction activities online.

  Knowledge Management: mySAP CRM enables customers to research and resolve their own service

 problems without involving service representatives. Customers can browse frequently asked questions

(FAQs) linked to specific products, or search for answers using natural language

  Request Management: mySAP CRM provides web customers the tools to create, update, and check

the status of service requests, throughout the entire service process. Key service request management

features includes an automatic check for entitlements, as well as the ability for customers to select the

most convenient appointment time for a field service visit.

  Live Customer Support: The Live Web Collaboration capabilities of mySAP CRM allow

organizations to provide immediate assistance to customers from within the Web site. Customers canchoose to chat, co-browse, e-mail, or submit a call-back request.

  Installed Base Management: mySAP CRM enables online customers to manage their current

 portfolios of purchased products. Customers can also initiate service requests from selected products or

installations through complete, personalized views of their purchased products and installations.

  Complaints and Returns: The complaints and returns capabilities of mySAP CRM let customers

create, maintain, and track their own complaints and returns.

Page 317: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 317/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-6

SAP AG2004

1. Solution Searchincl. FAQs by Product

2. Service Request Managementincl. Installed Base Management

3. Complaints and Return

Management in E-Commerceincl. Product Registration

E-Service Scenarios within the Solution Manager

Three Scenarios for E-

Service within the SAP

Solution Manager:

 

Solution Search

  The Solution Search is a set of self-help tools that your customers use to solve their problems.

  Customers who encounter a product problem should start with Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs),

which are designed to address the more common product issues faced by customers. If an FAQ Search

does not result in a problem resolution, customers can use the Solution Assistance, that enables them to

enter a problem description and perform a search on relevant solutions.

  If a solution still eludes customers after they have used the FAQ Search and the Solution Assistance,

they can turn to Live Customer Support to contact an agent directly.

Service Request Management

  A service request is a detailed message sent to an agent concerning a product problem. When your

customers create a service request, they can specify which product, installed base, or registered productis concerned by the request.

  In this scenario customers use a web interface to create a service request for an installed base

component. Customers check whether the service that they are requesting is covered by a warranty or a

service contract.

Page 318: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 318/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-7

Complaints and Returns Management in E-Commerce

  Your customers can create complaints so that you take action and meet their expectations. A complaint

can be linked to a registered product or an installed base component. Complaints can also be linked to

 products from the product catalog. E-Commerce enables customers to manage their complaints and

returns via the Web.

  In this scenario customers register a product so as to activate its warranty. They then create complaints

linked to a registered product with which they are not satisfied.

Supported Request Types: Service Request, Complaint, Information Request

Page 319: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 319/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-8

SAP AG2004

B2C

B2B

Internet Customer Self Service: B2B and B2C

Contact Person logs on

Consumer logs on

 

  E-Service is based on the Internet Customer Self Service (ICSS).

  The ICSS is an internet application that enables companies to provide online support and service to

customers via a Web interface that connects to an SAP CRM system.

  ICSS needs the following system components: CRM, Trex and SAP JE22 Server

  URLs:

  Business-to-Business (B2B): http://<webserver:port>/icss_b2b/

  Business-to-Consumer (B2C): http://<webserver:port>/icss_b2c/

  It is possible to integrate the scenario Business-to-Business (B2B) of the ICSS application into the SAP

Enterprise Portal. The Enterprise Portal as a single point of entry enables Internet- or Intranet users to

have access to different applications like Internet Sales and ICSS from one environment.

  There are two types of customizing:

  ICSS specific customizing: See configuration settings within the Solution Manager for more details

  SAF customizing: IMG Customer Relationship management  Enterprise Intelligence 

Software Agent Frame Work

Page 320: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 320/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-9

SAP AG2004

B2C2B

Account Self-Service – Registration

Contact person for a registeredcompany

Contact person for a non-

registered company

Private consumer 

Consumer with a customer ID

 

  Registration information is validated against CRM (for example, country, region, postal code).

  Optional to customize the immediate creation of the accounts or have a workflow triggered to the

security administrator (there is a workflow in registration process that you can configure, so that

someone has to get authorization from company to activate account).

  Security administrator will assign information security profile (covered later) segments data so they can

get access for specific data in the solution data base.

  A Web user can be either a service user or a named user. Each type comes with a different authorization

 profile. In the standard scenario, Web users would browse anonymously through the Web site as service

users. When they login, they switch to a named user based on their own authorization profile and

 business partner data.

  For security purposes, users of type named user cannot switch to other users.

  After the customer has logged in they can maintain their personal data, such as changing his or her

address.

Page 321: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 321/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-10

SAP AG2004

Current Solution

Administration Console

 

Administration Console

  The Administration Console allows the ICSS application administrator to maintain application

 parameters.

  This tool covers two main topics:

  Extended Configuration Management (XCM) (with CRM 4.0 SP04)

  Monitoring (ICSS statistics, Java Connector (JCO), System Cache , and so on)

  View and maintain the logging parameters

  View the log files of the application

  View information on the ICSS version currently installed

  Hint: With CRM 4.0 ICSS is integrated with the Computing Center Management System (CCMS)

allowing a system administrator to monitor information concerning several applications, including the

ICSS. This information can be viewed in the central monitoring system (TA RZ20).

  ICSS is monitored in the following ways:

-  ICSS sends information to CCMS concerning the following: ICSS version, Web.xml & XCM

configurations,

ICSS performance and activities

-  Heartbeat to monitor if the XCM components are correctly configured

-  Log file monitoring

Page 322: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 322/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-11

SAP AG2004

E-Service II

E-Service Overview

Solution Search

Service Request Management

Complaints and Returns Management in

E-Commerce

 

With Release 4.0, the Solution Search component in ICSS covers the following enhancements:

  Integration with TREX (new in 4.0)

  Free text search (usage of linguistic search method)

  Search refinement (new in 4.0)

  Feedback on search result (new in 4.0)

  Download and/or save attachments in a local disc space

  E-mail to third party

  Link to service request

Page 323: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 323/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-12

SAP AG2004

Solution Search in mySAP CRM

Review List of

Solutions

Enter SearchCriteria

Contact CustomerSupport

Solution to customer via

e-mail, chat or phone

Search FAQ’s

by Product

Review List of

FAQs

FAQ Search

Solution Search

Live Customer Support

11

22

33

44

55

66

Web front end ICSS

 

The scenario Solution Search helps to:

  Increase customer satisfaction – added convenience of 24x7 support

  Reduce cost per interaction by empowering customers to help themselves

  Provide consistent, accurate information for the customer

  Improve operational efficiency by removing agents from interactions that can be resolved using self

service

A customer could use the Solution Search in following manner:

  The customer has questions regarding an error in the installation process of a purchased product. The

customer accesses the vendor’s Web self-service site for Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs).

  The customer reviews the list of FAQs for the product, but the information is not listed.  The customer expands the search by entering the description and characteristics of the problem for a

search on the vendor’s knowledge base.

  The customer reviews all the relevant solutions displayed, finds the matched solution to the problem,

 but requires clarification on one of the processes.

  The customer initiates a Web chat with a live interaction center agent to clarify the solution process.

  The contact center agent answers the customer inquiry and emails additional information to the

customer.

Page 324: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 324/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-13

SAP AG2004

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

FAQs are linked to a product and a problem Products are assigned to a product hierarchy

Problems need to be in a released status and

with at least one released solution

Solutions are retrieved from the Solution Data

Base

FAQ Search

 

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) are designed to address the more common product issues faced by

customers. FAQs by product enable ICSS users to access solutions related to a specific product. Insteadof writing a problem description themselves and conducting a specific search, users can save time and

 browse through pre-defined FAQs.

CRM Backend System Configuration

  Define the product hierarchy for the Internet Customer Self-Service. To define which product categories

are offered for selection in ICSS and thus determine which products will appear in ICSS, in

Customizing, choose Customer Relationship Management   E-Service   Internet Customer Self-

Service  Define Hierarchy for Product Selection in the Internet  .

  To create FAQs in the CRM system:

  Run transaction CRMD_IIA_FAQ. A product selection dialog box appears.

  Press F4 to select the product for which you want create an FAQ.

  You are now in FAQ main screen. The product that you just selected should now appear under the

Product Description area.

  Choose Change to switch to edit mode.

Page 325: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 325/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-14

  Search Criteria: the Search for  Problem dialog box will automatically appear if the selected product

does not have an FAQ maintained for it yet. Use F4 in the  Problem field to select a problem to link to

the product that you chose above.

  Your selected problem should appear in the FAQ area.

  Replace the default text How to (problem number) with the text for your FAQ.

  Save.

  If automatic compilation is not switched on, compile the solution database index. This enables the

search engine to find the FAQs.

Page 326: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 326/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-15

SAP AG2004

Solution Search

Search

earch

Terms

erms

Solution

Database

ProblemsSolutions

Words, phrases

 

  Based on the Software Agent Framework (SAF) to enhance performance.

  TREX search engine is used to retrieve problems and solutions.  User can

  Refine a solution search list.

  View, insert & delete My Solutions when logged in.

  Access detailed information and/or provide feedback to the found solution.

  Download and save attachments and/or email a solution to a third party.

  How to create problems and solutions:

  To create problems and solutions you can either:

1. Use TA IS01 (TA IS02 is no longer used)

2. Use SAF search service (BSP application CRM_BSP_FRAME ) e.g. in the SAP Portal.

  You can also start this BSP application in the CRM:

1. Execute the Transaction SE80.2 .Select BSP Application From drop dowm menu and Type CRM_BSP_FRAME, then select

display icon.

3. Expand Pages with Flow Logic then double click select.htm and execute this file using the

Test/Execute icon.

  Then you need to compile via SAF compilation service to publish problems/solutions in a form of

entities in the TREX index server either via BSP application CRM_EI_CMP_ADMN in the CRM

(transaction SE80) or in the SAP Enterprise Portal.

Page 327: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 327/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-16

SAP AG2004

Solution Search: Security Profile

Assign profiles to the user in order to reduce/enlarge the

authorized entities list

Personalized views for Internet user

through security profiles

 

Page 328: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 328/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-17

SAP AG2004

Compilation Service

Problems and solutions must be compiled prior to search.

The following compilation options are available:

Full Compilation

Delta Compilation

Cluster 

Delta or full compilations can be scheduled as background jobs

at regular intervals.

 

  Full Compilation: Compiles all documents. Recommended initially and if the index is corrupted.

  Delta Compilation: Compiles all new and changed documents since the last compilation, and removes

deleted documents from the index.

  Cluster: Groups documents and features into different classes called clusters. The document/cluster

relationship and feature/cluster relationship are used to refine the results of searches.

  Delete Index: Full compilation is necessary afterwards.

  Background jobs can be scheduled (for example, to trigger daily updates).

  How to compile via SAF in the SAP Enterprise Portal:

  a. In the Enterprise Portal, access the CRM Portal Administrator  role.

  b. Choose  Knowledge Administration ¨ Indexes.

  c. Select the knowledge bases that you want to compile.  d. Choose a compilation action (for example,  Full Compile, Delta Compile, or Cluster ).

  e. Submit the information.

  The request is sent to the Java compilation server. After the Java compilation server has

  processed the request, the compilation log table is updated.

Page 329: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 329/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-18

  Another option to compile is to run the run the SAF diagnosis tool (see SAF documentation)

  Checklist to avoid common problems with the Solution Search.:

  No TREX server declared in the customizing

  TREX index server is not responding

  ICSS version does not match to CRM version. ICSS must be in the same SP as the CRM system

  No SAF SDA deployed (mandatory from SP04 on)

  User authorizations ICSS log files are useful to detect the source of problems

Page 330: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 330/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-19

SAP AG2004

Software Agent Framework – Overview

Other SAP CRM

Database(s)

Other SAP

Database(s)

Non-SAP

Database(s)

CaseService Order 

Ibase (e.g., BP)

HRFI

PLM (e.g., Equipm.)

Lotus NotesSQL

DBMS

Solution Database

(SDB)

ProblemsSolutions

FAQs

Software

Agent

Framework

SAP Service ProcessesSAP Service Processes

Business Partner

(from Ibase)

Business Partner

(from Ibase)Plant Info

(from Equipment)

Plant Info

(from Equipment)

CompileCompile

 A single Knowledge Entity iscreated with both pieces of

information

 A single Knowledge Entity iscreated with both pieces of

information

 

  The Software Agent Framework (SAF) provides an open architecture that can integrate tools to easily

and flexibly assemble information from multiple SAP CRM data sources, SAP non-CRM data sources(such as Business Information Warehouse and SAP R/3), and external data sources.

  Software Agent Framework features:

  Define Knowledge Bases.

  Compile the content of knowledge bases into search indexes (requires TREX).

  Automatically synchronize knowledge bases and search indexes (requires TREX).

  Cluster the contents of search indexes for knowledge bases (requires TREX).

  Search a knowledge base.

  Refine the search (requires TREX).  Build your own information security for knowledge bases.

  SAF customizing: IMG Customer Relationship management  Enterprise Intelligence Software

Agent Frame Work.

Page 331: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 331/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-20

  The minimum SAF configuration for ICCS is:

1. Name and Configure Knowledge base (ICSS uses SDB and SDB attachments):

 Configure Language and feedback for both SDB and SDBATTACHMENT,

use default for the rest

2. Name and Configure Search Engine

3. Configure Compilation, Clustering, and Classification (This is needed for compiling

 problems/solutions)

4. Configure Application Configure the search query parameters based on customers' database and

need, use default for the rest

Page 332: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 332/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-21

SAP AG2004

To access the LWC you must launch ICSS

and click on Contact Us

After clicking on contact us you will get this

pop-up which enables you to choose one of

four options to use:

E-mail

Callback

Chat

Internet Telephony

Live Web Collaboration (LWC)

Enable the direct communication between the

Customer and the CIC Agent.

 

The LWC functionality in the E-Service (ICSS) scenario is the same as in the CRM Web shop.

  E-Mail:

  A HTML form is displayed and enables you to write down your message. Upon submitting your

message, an e-mail will be sent to the e-mail address set in the customizing file(cic-config.properties,

the parameter is cic.mail.to=…..@……

  Note: This option doesn’t need the CIC Agent side to be active.

  Callback:

  Send the telephone request to the agent side. The CIC agent will receive the telephone number of the

customer and use it to call back.

  Chat:

  The chat’s option enables a live communication between the customer and CIC agent .To perform

this option, both sides (CIC agent and LWC customer) have to be available. A HTML form which

enable you to chat with a CIC Agent will be displayed.

The customer sends the chat request and the CIC Agent has to pick it before starting the chat.

  The chat is initialized by the customer.

  Internet Telephony:

  Enables the client to speak with a CIC agent over internet telephony.

Page 333: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 333/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-22

SAP AG2004

E-Service III

E-Service Overview

Solution Search

Service Request Management

Complaints and Returns Management in

E-Commerce

 

With Release 4.0, the service and information request component in ICSS covers the following

enhancements:

  Create Service request

  Add external reference

  Link a service product

  Display and link contracts

  Display warranties

  Get an appointment

  Search service and information request

  Searching by multiple priorities

  Searching for a company

  Searching by an installed base component

  Searching by transaction number

  Display Service request

  List of contracts linked to the service request

  Display the appointment list

Page 334: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 334/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-23

SAP AG2004

Appointment

Scheduling

Service Contract

and Warranty

Entitlement Check

Create

Service RequestInstalled Base

Processing

Service Request Management in mySAP CRM

Service

Analysis

Request

Management 

Billing

Service

Request

Processing

Web front end ICSS

11

2233

44

5566

77

 

  The customer creates a service request for the created product sub-component by selecting the service

to be performed from a catalog of available services for the product.

  The customer selects the product for which a service request should be created from his list of installed

 products, reviews the information, and creates a sub-component to the product.

  The customer reviews the contract/warranty information and selects the appropriate contract/warranty

if there are multiple contracts/warranties available for the selected service.

  The customer selects an appointment for a service representative visit from the list of available

appointments, which are based on entered customer preferences and submits the service request.

  The field service representative performs the service assignment at the customer site and performs

confirmation for the work done, materials used etc.

  The service manager checks and approves the confirmation data, decides which costs should be billed

to the customer and triggers the billing of the customer.  The service manager performs analyses of the complete service order processing cycle, including

service level compliance analysis, service contract profitability analysis and customer satisfaction level

analysis.

  Installed Base Management – search, display, create and maintain installed base structure and its

components, request service for selected products of the installed base

  Appointment Scheduling – ability to request a preferred date and time for an onsite visit

  Contract/Warranty Entitlement Check  – automatic validation of service contract and warranty

entitlements

Page 335: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 335/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-24

SAP AG2004

Service Request Management

Request Management enables Web customers to

create update and track the status of service

requests throughout the entire service process.

Reference to products, installations, and service

Real-time scheduling of preferred appointments

Automatic validation of contract and warranty entitlements

Customers can request their preferred method of resolution

including:

Exchange of the product for a new one

Credit to the customer for the costs associated with the product or

service Return of the product without a new or replacement product issued

Full status and tracking of requests from initial creation to final

resolution

 

  When Web users create a Service Request, they specify which product, installed base, or registered

 product is concerned. They also select the service that they need. Upon service selection, the systemwill search for:

  Contracts that cover the requested service. If the service is covered by more than one contracts, users

will select the most suitable one.

  Available appointments for this service. Users will select a time that is convenient for them

  Web users can also:

  Attach documents.

  Display their service requests and monitor their status. If a service request is covered by a service

contract, that contract can be viewed in the detail view of the service request. If a service request was

linked to a solution, that solution can also be viewed in the detail view of the service request.  Update their service request details by adding information and/or changing their status. They can also

add new attachments. However, if they want to change the appointment scheduled for a service, they

must call their customer service representative.

  Chronologically display texts entered by themselves as well as replies entered by the agent.

Page 336: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 336/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-25

SAP AG2004

Manage and structure purchased

products.

Initiate a service request from a

selected product or installation.

Integration to warranty and contract

management including validation of

warranties during service processes.

Installed Base Management

Installed Base Management

 

Create Installed Base/Component

  Web users can add installed bases or components into their installed base list.

  Web users can create components of types individual product (iProduct), Text, and Object.

Components of type individual Object (iObject) can be created from a new object or from an existing

one.

Display Installed Base List

  Web users can view a list of their installed bases. The installed base view can be expanded to display its

components

  When Web users select an installed base or a component from the installed base list, they can:

  Display the details of the selected installed base or component

  Create a sub-component for the selected installed base or component

  Create a service request or a complaint for the selected component

Display Installed Base/Component Detail

  Web users can display the details of an installed base, or of a component within the installed base.

Components can be of type Text, Product, Individual Object (iObject), or  Installed base. Web users can

also update components of types Text and Product.

  Web users can also create a service request or a complaint related to a component from the installed

 base list. Web users can create service requests or complaints for components of all types, except

components of type  Installed base .

Page 337: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 337/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-26

SAP AG2004

Create service request

Search and display

Service requests

Update service request

Create Service Request

 

  Web users can choose selection criteria to filter the requests. They can view requests created within a

date range, select a specific request type, and select a specific request status. If the Web user is a contactof a company, he can choose between viewing his own requests or those of his company. If he is a

consumer, he will automatically view his own requests.

With Release 4.0, the Service request component in ICSS covers the following functionalities:

  Create Service request

  General service request Information

  Service request item

  List of attachments related to the service request

  Search and display service requests

  Enter search criteria  The search results in a list of service requests

  Selecting a service request from list gives the general information of the service request and

information of its item

  Update Service request

  Change the status

  Add notes

  Add attachment

Page 338: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 338/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-27

SAP AG2004

Appointment Scheduling

Appointment Scheduling

Request preferred date and time for

an onsite service representative visit

Integration to Resource Planning

Tool

 

  For the Resource Planning Tool SAP APO is needed.

Page 339: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 339/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-28

SAP AG2004

The transaction type

Subject profiles

The catalog

The code groups and codes for catalogs

Code groups profiles

The Web transaction type

The service product catalog

Customizing Service Request: CRM Server 

On the CRM Server define…

 

  Define the transaction type:

  CRM   Transaction   Basic Settings   Define Transaction Types

  Usually the transaction type S1 (Service request) and S3 (information request) exist, you can change

its customizing.

  Define Subject Profiles:

  CRM   Basic Functions   Catalog, Codes and Profiles   Define Subject Profiles

  Define the subject profile Complaint with subject profile category Service.

  Link this service profile to the catalog Damage.

  Define which catalog category will be used for the defined profile.

  Define the catalog:

  CRM   Basic Functions   Catalog, Codes and Profiles   Catalogs

  Add the catalogs Damage to the list of the catalogs.

Page 340: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 340/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-29

  Define the code groups and codes for catalogs:

  Add for the catalogs Damage the code groups and codes of each groups.

  Define Code groups profiles:

  CRM   Basic Functions   Catalog, Codes and Profiles   Define Code Groups and Codes for

Catalogs

  CRM   Basic Functions   Catalog, Codes and Profiles   Define code groups Profiles

  For the subject profile Service and for the catalogs Damage specify the code groups and codes that

will be used.

  Define the Web transaction type:

  CRM   Eservice   ICSS   Set Up internet Transaction  Define Transaction Type for Internet

  Add the web transaction type S1 (service request) and S3 (information request) and link them

respectively to the transaction type S1 and S3 and to the profile Service.

  Define the service product catalog:

  CRM   Eservice   ICSS   Set Up internet Transaction  Product catalog usage

  Define which service product catalog and variant will be used in service request creation.

Page 341: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 341/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-30

SAP AG2004

The Web transaction type

The service request catalog

Availability of some areas during the creation

Define/customize

Customizing Service Request: Java

 

  Define the web transaction type:

  SR_CONF_CREATE_SERVREQ_TYPE:This parameter specifies which Internet transaction type is

used for the creation of service request in CRM.

  SR_CONF_CREATE_INFOREQ_TYPE: This parameter specifies which Internet transaction type is

used for the creation of information request in CRM.

  Define the service request catalog:

   PCAT_FOR_REFERENCE_OBJECT: Determines the reference object catalog.

   PCAT_FOR_SERVICE_REQUEST_ITEM: Determines the service request catalog.

  Customize availability of some area during the creation:

  SR_CONF_SHIPTO_ADDRESS_SELECTION_DISPLAY: Determines if the ship-to address selectionfeature is available during the service request creation.

  SR_CONF_REFERENCE_OBJECT_DISPLAY: Determines if the reference object selection area is

available for user entry during the service request creation.

  SR_CONF_APPOINTMENT_DISPLAY: Determines if the appointment selection area is available for

user entry during the service request creation.

Page 342: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 342/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-31

  SR_CONF_ITEM_DISPLAY: Determines if the item area is available for user entry during the

service request creation.

  SR_CONF_ATTACHMENT_DISPLAY: Determines if the attachment area is available for user entry

during the service request creation.

   PCAT_FOR_COMPLAINT_ITEM: This is the indicator of the product catalog used in the ComplaintItem of Complaint function. The type of product in this catalog could be Material or Service.

Page 343: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 343/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-32

SAP AG2004

E-Service IV

E-Service Overview

Solution Search

Service Request Management

Complaints and Returns Management in

E-Commerce

 

With Release 4.0, the complaint component in ICSS covers the following enhancements:

  Create Complaint

  Added the following fields to the item

-  Reference object

-  Follow up action

-  View button to display the contract and warranty

  Linking attachments to the complaint

  Search complaints

  Searching by multiple priorities

  Searching for a company

  Searching by an installed base component  Searching by transaction number

  Display complaints

  List of attachments related to the complaint

  Display item detail related to complaint

  Added the contract information

  Added the list of follow up actions for the item

  Added the summary of actions taken as a result of the follow up actions

Page 344: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 344/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-33

SAP AG2004

Complaints and Returns Management – Features

Complaint management – Create complaints,

check whether warranty exists or a product can

be returned.

Customer requested actions – Indicate

requested actions during the complaint creation.

Product Registration – Register purchased

products, from the list of registered products the

product warranty can be viewed and a service

request or complaint can be initiated.

Logistics integration – Monitor and track

products to be returned or substitute products to

be delivered.

Defect tracking – Analyze complaint reasons

and assign the identified causes to prevent

further complaints.

 

The scenario Complaints and Returns Management helps to:

  Reduce internal costs for order processing by automatically triggering the relevant steps for returning

 products and issuing credit memos.

  Increase customer satisfaction by providing different options for creating a unique return material

authorization number.

  Permanently improve product quality by defect tracking, analyzing complaint reasons, identifying

causes, defining required activities and product changes, and monitoring success.

  Increase customer satisfaction by using customer surveys to ask customers with complaints for their

feedback.

  Improve complaint processing by providing access to all related documents and data.

Page 345: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 345/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-34

SAP AG2004

Complaints and Returns Management in mySAP CRM

Complaints & Returns

Management 

Complaint

Processing

Service

Analysis

Billing

Web front end ICSS

Create ComplaintSelect Registered

ProductRegister Product

11

2233

44

55

66

 

  The customer wants to register a recently purchased product. For this purpose the product is selected

from the product catalog and the registration information, such as purchase date and location, areentered.

  The customer selects the recently registered product from his list of registered products for the purpose

of creating a complaint after having confirmed that the product is still under warranty.

  The customer enters the complaint information and indicates the actions that in his opinion should be

taken, such as a credit memo or a product return.

  The service employee performs a technical analysis of the returned customer product and decides that

the customer should be compensated for the incomplete service through a product replacement and a

credit to his account.

  The service manager checks if there are any costs that the customer should be billed for and triggers

the billing of the customer if necessary.

  Using predefined queries and reports, the service manager analyzes complaint reasons and decides

what actions should be taken to prevent future complaints and checks whether the actions taken were

successful.

Page 346: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 346/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-35

SAP AG2004

Product Registration

Individual Object

Product Registration

Registration of

products to activate

warranty

My registered products

From registered

product list a service

request or a complaint

can be initiated

 

  Your customers register products and services so as to activate their warranty. Once a product is

registered, it is added to the  My Registered Products page, where customers can find all their registered products. For each product, they can view warranty information, create service requests, and create

complaints. In this process customers register a product over the Web by logging in and choosing their

 purchased product from the integrated product catalog.

  Before products can be registered, they need an entry in the Permitted Object Categories (Product

 Master   SAP Basic Data) .

  Product registration leads to the creation of an individual object in the CRM system.

  Display of individual objects in CRM-System (transaction COMMPR01) is possible with user

 parameter COMMPR01_IND_OBJ = X. Customer and product information is available within

 Relationships.

Page 347: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 347/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-36

SAP AG2004

Select Registered Product

Create Complaint

Create Complaint for Registered Product

 

  Web users can create complaints about goods or services that they deem unsatisfactory. Each complaint

is made up of items that Web users add to the complaint. For each complaint item, users explain whytheir expectations were not met and state the actions that they request from you.

  Web users can:

  Request a credit, a return or a replacement

  Check whether a contract/warranty exists

  Specify a reference object (Installed Base Component or Registered Product)

  Attach documents

With Release 4.0, the Complaint component in ICSS covers the following functionalities:

  Create Complaint

  General Complaint Information

  List of Items related to the complaint  List of attachments related to the complaint

  Search and Display Complaints

  Enter search criteria

  The search results in a list of complaints.

  Selecting a complaint from list gives the general information and the list of items related to the

complaint.

  Selecting an item from the list displays the detailed information of the item as well as the follow up

action related to the item.

Page 348: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 348/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-37

SAP AG2004

The transaction type

Subject profiles

The catalog

The code groups and codes for catalogs

Code groups profiles

The Web transaction type

Complaints Customizing: CRM Server 

Define …

 

  Define transaction types

  CRM   Transaction   Basic Settings   Define Transaction Types

  Usually the transaction type CRMC (SAP Complaint) exists; you can change its customizing.

  Define subject profiles:

  CRM   Basic Functions   Catalog, Codes and Profiles   Define Subject Profiles

  Define the subject profile Complaint with subject profile category Service.

  Link this service profile to the catalog Reason.

  For ICSS 4.0 and higher add also the catalog Customer Request. The two catalogs must have level 1.

  For each catalog define which catalog category will be used for the defined profile.

  Define the catalog:

  CRM   Basic Functions   Catalog, Codes and Profiles   Catalogs

  Add the catalogs Reason and the catalog Customer Request to the list of the catalogs.

Page 349: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 349/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-38

  Define the code groups and codes for catalogs:

  CRM   Basic Functions   Catalog, Codes and Profiles   Define Code Groups and Codes for

Catalogs

  Add for the catalogs Reason and the catalog Customer Request the code groups and codes of each

groups.

  Define code groups profiles:

  CRM   Basic Functions   Catalog, Codes and Profiles   Define code groups Profiles

  For the subject profile Complaint and for the catalogs Reason and the catalog Customer Request

specify the code groups and codes that will be used.

  Define the Web transaction type:

  CRM   Eservice   ICSS   Set Up internet Transaction  Define Transaction Type for Internet

  Add the Web transaction type CRMC and link it to the transaction type CRMC and to the profile

Complaint.

Page 350: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 350/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-39

SAP AG2004

Web transaction type

Mandatory fields

Reference Object

Attachment viewable

Product catalog usage

Complaints Customizing: Java

Define/customize…

 

  Define the Web transaction type:

  COMP_CONF_CREATE_TRANS_TYPE : This parameter specifies which Internet transaction type is

used for creation in CRM. This parameter must match one of the Internet transaction type defined in

Customizing.

  Define the mandatory fields:

  COMP_CONF_PRIORITY_MANDATORY : Determines if the priority field on complaint creation is a

mandatory field or not.

  COMP_CONF_REASON_MANDATORY : Determines if the reason field on complaint creation is a

mandatory field or not.

  COMP_CONF_PRODUCT_MANDATORY : Determines if the product field on complaint creation is

a mandatory field or not.

  Customize display Reference Object:  COMP_CONF_REFERENCE_OBJECT_DISPLAY : Determines if the reference object selection area

is available for user entry.

  Customize of Attachment viewable:

  COMP_CONF_ATTACHMENT_DISPLAY : Determines if the attachment area is available for user

entry.

  Customize of Product catalog usage:

   PCAT_FOR_COMPLAINT_ITEM : This is the indicator of the product catalog used in the Complaint

Item of Complaint function. The type of product in this catalog could be Material or Service.

Page 351: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 351/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-40

SAP AG2004

E-Service: Unit Summary

You are now able to:

Describe the E-Service functions

Explain how to use E-Service

 

Page 352: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 352/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-41

Exercises

Unit: E-Service

Topic: FAQs

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:

•  Maintain FAQs and Solutions.

•  Self-register as a private consumer at the E-Service scenario.

•  Register a purchased product.

•  Create a service request with reference to your registered product.

1 Check out Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) and the solution search.

You recently bought a notebook (Notebook Professional 17) and have now detected astrange noise coming from your CD-drive. Check if you can find a solution.

1-1 Call E-Service ( B2C) via the following URL:

http://<webserver>:50100/icss_b2c/resetSession.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM800&la

nguage=en 

1-2 Go to the FAQs area and search for a FAQ referring to Notebook Professional17 Computer.

Field Name or Data Type Values

 Product category PCShop Products

 Product Notebook Professional 17

Check out the solutions provided and send one to your e-mail address.

1-3 You did not find a solution for your problem so far. Now try the solution search.

Page 353: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 353/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-42

2 Optional: Maintain Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

Complaints accumulate for the product T-VPR## (Printer configurable). Customers do notknow, what to do when the operating lamp is flashing. Create a FAQ on this topic.

2-1 Within the CRM start the FAQ maintenance for the item T-VPR## .

2-2 Search for a problem such as “operating lamp is flashing” and assign it to your

 printer.

2-3 Check which hierarchy needs to be assigned to products so that they appear in E-

Service.

2-4 Assign the hierarchy (and category PC shop products) to your product THT-00-##  in

the product master. 

2-5 Call E-Service (B2C) again via the following URL and to check that a FAQ for your product T-VPR##  now appears.

http://<webserver>:50100/icss_b2c/resetSession.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM800&language

=en 

3 Optional: Maintenance of the Solution Search

3-1 Log on to the CRM system and access to SE80. Select and display BSP application

CRM_BSP_FRAME , right click on  select.htm  page and choose Test . Choose Problems to create problems (symptoms) or Solutions to create solutions.

3-2 Create a problem (Type: High Tech) and attach a solution to it.

3-3 Start E-Service again and check if your problem/solution appears in the solution

search. Why is it not displayed yet?

3-4 Delta compile the knowledge database SDB.

3-5 Check again to see if your problem/solution appears in the solution search.

Page 354: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 354/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-43

4 Self-registration as a private consumer.

4-1 Call again the URL that starts the E-Service (B2C) scenario.

http://<webserver>:50100/icss_b2c/resetSession.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM800&language

=en 

4-2 Choose  Log In. A new window will pop up. Since you don’t have a User ID yet, youhave to create one. Choose  Register .

Choose Registration Type  Private Consumer. 

Enter the following:

Title:  Mr./Ms.

First Name:  Jacky

Last Name:  Johnson-##

Street / House Number:  Marshall Rd. 8

Postal Code: 90210  

City:  Beverly Hills 

Country/Region: United States California

E-mail Address:  jacky.Johnson##@company.com 

User ID:  JJ##  

Password/Confirm Password: welcome/welcome 

Choose Submit . After the registration process is finished, close the window.

4-3 What did you just create in the CRM system?

Page 355: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 355/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-44

5 Product registration

5-1 Log on to the E-Service with the user ID and password created in the exercise above.

5-2 Click on the link that leads you into the area where you can register products.

In the catalog area on the left hand side, navigate to the  Laser Printer  area and clickon the product  Laser Allround .

Fill out product information.

Color type:  Both

Resolution: 2400 dpi

Serial Number: 12345-##

Printer Speed (ppm): Up to 40 ppm 

Purchase Date: Today

Choose  Register  , review the data and then choose Submit  Registration.

6 Optional: Create a Service Request

6-1 Take a look at the list of registered products. You should see one line item. Choosethe Service Request  link at the end of this line. A Service Request High Tech form is

displayed.

Enter the following data: 

Priority:  High

Subject:  Printer is noisy

PC: Reason Code:  Printer

Damage Code:  Loud Noise

Reference Object:  Registered Product  

Description: <any>

Take a look at the warranty status.

Save the service request and note the number.

 _____________________

Page 356: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 356/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-45

6-2 Take a look at the service request within the PC UI (or the CRM) and confirm thatthis is the request that was created via E-Service.

URL: http://<webserverID>.wdf.sap.corp:1080/SAPPortal> 

Log on to the portal with user SERVICEREP  and password welcome.

Field Name or Data Type Values

Get Transaction number

 Number The one from the exercise

above

Page 357: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 357/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-46

Page 358: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 358/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-47

Solutions

Unit: E-Service

Topic: FAQs

1 Check out Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) and the solution search.

You recently bought a notebook (Notebook Professional 17) and have now detected a

strange noise coming from your CD-drive. Check if you can find a solution.

1-1 Call E-Service ( B2C) via the following URL:

http://<webserver>:50100/icss_b2c/resetSession.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM800&language=en 

1-2 Go to the FAQs area and search for a FAQ referring to Notebook Professional 17

Computer.

Choose FAQs 

Field Name or Data Type Values

 Product category PCShop Products

 Product Notebook Professional 17

Choose Search.

1-3 Check out the solutions provided and send one to your e-mail address.

1-4 You did not find a solution for your problem so far. Now try the solution search.

Choose on the link Solution Search and check the solutions.

Page 359: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 359/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-48

2 Optional: Maintain Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

Complaints accumulate for the product T-VPR##  (Printer configurable). Customers do notknow what to do when the operating lamp is flashing. Create a FAQ on this topic.

2-1 Within the CRM start the FAQ maintenance for the item T-VPR##. 

Start Tx CRMD_IIA_FAQ.

A product selection dialog box appears.

Use F4 function key to select the product T-VPR##. 

You are now in the Frequently Asked Questions main screen.

Choose Change icon to switch to change mode.

2-2 Search for a problem such as “operating lamp is flashing” and assign it to your

 printer.

Via  find problems search for a problem. Use the F4 Help for the field Problem

number  to find a problem specified above (problem number 2). 

2-3 Check which hierarchy needs to be assigned to products so that they appear in E-Service.

Start Tx COMM_PRAPPLCAT  in the CRM. The hierarchy ICSS  is relevant for

E-Service.

2-4 Assign the hierarchy (and category PC shop products) to your product THT-00-##  in

the product master.

CRM    Master Data Products Maintain products

Assign hierarchy and category to the set type Product Categories.

2-5 Call E-Service (B2C) again via the following URL and to check that a FAQ for your

 product T-VPR##  now appears.

http://<webserver>:50100/icss_b2c/resetSession.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM800&l

anguage=en 

Page 360: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 360/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-49

3 Optional: Maintenance of the Solution Search

3-1 Log on to the CRM system and access to SE80. Select and display BSP applicationCRM_BSP_FRAME , right click on select.htm page and choose Test . Choose

 Problems to create problems (symptoms) or Solutions to create solutions.

Choose Pages with Flow Logic and then Select.htm. Select F8 and log on with

your CRM user. Then choose Problems.You would normally call this functionality via the portal.

3-2 Create a problem (Type: High Tech) and attach a solution to it.

3-3 Start E-Service again and check if your problem/solution appears in the solution

search. Why is it not displayed yet?

The database needs to be compiled.

3-4 Delta compile the knowledge database SDB.

 BSP application CRM_EI_CMP_ADMN in the CRM (transaction SE80)

default.htm F8

You would normally call this functionality via the CRM Portal Administrator role.

3-5 Check again to see if your problem/solution appears in the solution search.

4 Self registration as a private consumer

4-1 Call again the URL that starts the E-Service (B2C) scenario.

http://<webserver>:50100/icss_b2c/resetSession.do?scenario.xcm=IDESCRM800&language=en 

4-2 Choose  Log In. A new window will pop up. Since you don’t have a User ID yet, youhave to create one. Choose Register .

Choose Registration Type  Private Consumer. 

Enter the following:

Title:  Mr./Ms.

First Name:  Jacky

Last Name:  Johnson-##  

Street/House Number:  Marshall Rd. 8

Postal Code: 90210

Page 361: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 361/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-50

City:  Beverly Hills 

Country/Region: United States / California 

E-mail Address:  jacky.Johnson##@company.com 

User ID:  JJ##

Password/Confirm Password: welcome/welcome 

Choose Submit . After the registration process is finished, close the window.

4-3 What did you just create in the CRM system?

An Internet user (SU01) and a business partner account.

5 Product registration

5-1 Log on to the E-Service with the user ID and password created in the exercise

above.

5-2 Click on the link that leads you into the area where you can register products.

In the catalog area on the left hand side, navigate to the  Laser Printer  area and

choose the product  Laser Allround .

Fill out product information.

Color type:  Both

Resolution: 2400 dpi

Serial Number: 12345-##

Printer Speed (ppm): up to 40 ppm 

Purchase Date: today

Choose  Register , review the data and choose Submit   Registration.

Page 362: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 362/416

© SAP AG CR800 8-51

6 Optional: Create a Service Request

6-1 Take a look at the list of registered products. You should see one line item. Choosethe Service Request  link at the end of this line. A Service Request High Tech form is

displayed.

Enter the following data: 

Priority:  High

Subject:  Printer is noisy 

PC: Reason Code:  Printer

Damage Code:  Loud Noise

Reference Object:  Registered Product  

Description: <any>

Take a look at the warranty status.

Save the service request and note the number.

 _____________________

6-2 Take a look at the service request within the PC UI (or the CRM) and confirm that

this is the request that was created via E-Service.

URL: http://<webserverID>.wdf.sap.corp:1080/SAPPortal> 

Log on to the portal with user SERVICEREP  and password welcome.

Path: Service and Support Orders 

In the search area enter the following:

Field Name or Data Type Values

Get Transaction number

 Number The one from the exercise

above

Choose Go.

Page 363: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 363/416

© SAP AG CR800 9-1

SAP AG2004

E-Analytics

8. E-Servicea) Solution Search

b) Service Request Management

c) Complaints and Returns Managementin E-Commerce

9. E-Analytics

Appendix

Units

1. Foundation and Architecture

2. Shop and User Management

3. Catalog Setup

4. Order and Contract Processing

5. Price Determination and ATP

Check

6. Additional E-Selling Scenarios

7. E-Marketing

 

Page 364: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 364/416

© SAP AG CR800 9-2

SAP AG2004

E-Analytics

Overview E-Analytics

Sales Analyses

Web Site Monitoring

Web Analytics

Architecture

 

Page 365: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 365/416

© SAP AG CR800 9-3

SAP AG2004

E-Analytics: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit you will be able to:

Explain what kind of analyses SAP offers to improve you

E-Commerce solution

 

Page 366: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 366/416

© SAP AG CR800 9-4

SAP AG2004

E-Analytics I

Overview E-Analytics

Sales Analyses

Web Site Monitoring

Web Analytics

Architecture

 

Page 367: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 367/416

© SAP AG CR800 9-5

SAP AG2004

E-Analytics Overview and Objectives

Provide Business Metrics to measure and optimize the

success of the interaction channel E-Commerce

Sales analyses of a Web shop:

Allow Web shop owners to analyze sales figures and sales-related

information of their Web shop

Technical analyses of a Web shop:

Allow Web shop owners to analyze the technical health and

performance of their Web shop

Customer Behavior analyses of a Web shop:

Allow Web shop owners to analyze how customers are navigating

through their Web shop

 

  Sales Analyses: Based on CRM objects (order, quotation, contract); uses standard CRM Sales

Analytics Business Content (for orders, quotations, contracts) with a filtered view on the distributionchannel Internet; reports include Sales Statistics, Top n Products, Top n Customers, Top n Quotations,

Contracts

  Technical Analyses: Based on analyzing Standard Web Log files; uses Web Site Monitoring;

reports include Status of Web site, Number of Hits/Page Views, External Referrers, Download Volume,

Server Load

  Customer Behavior Analyses: Based on analyzing; uses Web Analytics; reports include Event

tracking (Top n viewed/added/deleted/ordered products), Conversion Rates (Login/Order, View/Order,

Add/Order)

Page 368: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 368/416

© SAP AG CR800 9-6

SAP AG2004

E-Analytics II

Overview E-Analytics

Sales Analyses

Web Site Monitoring

Web Analytics

Architecture

 

Page 369: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 369/416

© SAP AG CR800 9-7

SAP AG2004

Sales Analyses: Sales Order and Quotation Analysis

Examples of Reports include:

Quotation Success Rate

Incoming Sales Orders

Top Ten Products

Top Ten Customers

Examples of Reports include:

Quotation Success Rate

Incoming Sales Orders

Top Ten Products

Top Ten Customers

A range of analyses for sales quotations and sales orders that provide

detailed analytical information about the sales that have taken place in

your organization

 

  SAP also offers sales analyses for contracts. Examples of reports include:

  Completed Sales Contracts

  Cancelled Sales Contracts

  Top Ten Contracts

  Products in Sales Contracts

Page 370: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 370/416

© SAP AG CR800 9-8

SAP AG2004

Example of E-Analytics > Sales Analyses

 

Page 371: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 371/416

© SAP AG CR800 9-9

SAP AG2004

E-Analytics III

Overview E-Analytics

Sales Analyses

Web Site Monitoring

Web Analytics

Architecture

 

Page 372: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 372/416

© SAP AG CR800 9-10

SAP AG2004

Technical Analyses – What is Analyzed?

Web

LogFilesIP address of requesting client

HTTP response code

Date and time of a request

Browser type

Method

Bytes sent/received

Protocol version

Server IP

Referrer 

J2EE App Server 

Apache

IIS

etc.

„click“„click“„click“

„click“

„click“

 

  Web Log Files can be written from every Web server

  Problems obtaining information

  Only records technical data when customers access a web site

  It is difficult to track the order in which customers take actions

  Details of dynamically generated pages are not visible

  Misleading for Business Analysis

  The main purpose is to record technical details of Web server activity

  Logs how often certain files and graphics that appear on multiple pages are accessed

  Cannot provide information about what a customer sees or the context in which customers act

Page 373: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 373/416

© SAP AG CR800 9-11

SAP AG2004

Example of E-Analytics > Web Site Monitoring

 

  A range of technical-focused reports that provide detailed analytical information to quickly detect

technical problems and to maintain a well functioning web shop.

  Examples of delivered reports (queries) include:

  Technical Status of Web site (0WEB_C01_Q0002): This query analyses the technical status of a

website. Analysis for broken links, download-volume, used protocols and methods, etc. for each

server per daily interval is possible.

  Number of Hits (0WEB_C01_Q0001): This query displays the number of hits (the number of files

requested by a visitor) and the file-volume sent from the server to the client (in byte) per day.

  User Data (0WEB_C01_Q0003): This query analysis (technical) user-specific data.

  Top Ten External Referrers (0WEB_C01_Q0101): This query displays the top referrers.

  Visits, Page Impressions, Hits (0WEB_C01_Q0102): This query displays the number of visits, pageimpressions, and hits.

Page 374: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 374/416

© SAP AG CR800 9-12

SAP AG2004

E-Analytics IV

Overview E-Analytics

Sales Analyses

Web Site Monitoring

Web Analytics

Architecture

 

  sdf

Page 375: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 375/416

© SAP AG CR800 9-13

SAP AG2004

Customer Behavior ...?

in a

Bricks and Mortar Store

in a

Web Shop

In a Web shop, all you know is what a customer ordered.

But you don not know what other products they considered …

 

  Unlike in a bricks-and-mortar store, in a Web shop it is difficult to get information about what your

customers are doing while they are visiting your Web shop:

  Brick-and-Mortar Store:

  Customer walks along the shelves

  Customer picks up an item and looks at it

  Customer places it in the cart and moves on

  Customer looks at additional items in the store, places a second item in the cart

  Customer takes the first item back out of the cart

  Customer goes to the register

  Web Shop:

  Customer browses the catalog

  Customer looks at the detail view of the product

  Customer places the item into the shopping basket

  Customer continues browsing the catalog, places a second item into the shopping basket

  Customer deletes the first item from the shopping basket

  Customer places an order

  In the end, in a Web shop, all you know is what a customer ordered. More importantly, you don‘t know

what other products they considered, or why they left – technical problems, availability, did not like

 product details.

Page 376: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 376/416

© SAP AG CR800 9-14

SAP AG2004

Web Event Capture in mySAP CRM E-Commerce

Place order 

Delete item

from basket 

 Add item

to basket 

Create

basket 

Change

basket item

View product 

View

category Delete basket 

Register 

user User login

A set of Business Events is integrated in mySAP CRM E-Commerce

(B2B and B2C scenarios)

 

  Predefined business events in SAP CRM E-Commerce to capture customer interaction in the Web shop

  Business Event: specific action executed by the user that can be identified and recorded

  Enables you to trace the customer's steps on the Web.

  It is possible to replay customers sessions and so to see how customers moved in the shop.

Page 377: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 377/416

© SAP AG CR800 9-15

SAP AG2004

Data Captured per Event

 Add Add

to basket to basket 

………

<appevent status="OK" type="WebLogic" event="ADD_TO_BASKET"

timestamp="2001-08-26T09:56:17.904Z" app="SAP Internet Sales" >

<group type="Item" >

<var name="Description" value=""/>

<var name="Quantity" value="1"/>

<var name="OldQuantity" value="0"/>

<var name="AvailabilityDate" value="2001-08-26T12:00:00.000Z"/>

<var name="Unit" value="ST"/>

<var name="SKU" value="M-04"/>

<var name="ProductName" value="Sunny Extrem"/>

<var name="Availability" value=“0"/>

<var name="BasketID" value="3B87E9F1DD6D0057E10000000A1145B5"/>

<var name="Manufacturer" value=""/>

<var name="Currency" value="EUR"/>

<var name="BasketCategory" value=""/>

<var name="TotalPrice" value="10.00"/>

<var name="UnitPrice" value="10.00"/>

<var name="Category" value=""/>

</group>

</appevent>

………

Data associated with each event are captured in an XML file

similar to:

CreateCreate

basket basket 

Modify Modify basket basket itemitem

 

  Check the availability!

Page 378: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 378/416

© SAP AG CR800 9-16

SAP AG2004

Example of E-Analytics > Web Analytics

 

  A range of reports that provide detailed analytical information about how web shop customers navigate

through the web shop and what products they look at and buy.

  Examples of Reports include:

  Conversion Rate (0WEB_C04_Q0002_V02/V03):

  Event Statistics (0WEB_C04_Q0002_V06)

  Visitor Session (0WEB_C04_Q0002_V01)

  Viewed Products (0WEB_C04_Q0001_V05)

  Ordered Products (0WEB_C04_Q0001_V07)

  Conversion Rate Analytics:

Measures the percentage of users in a given time frame that, when given the opportunity, choose tocomplete an action at your website. Conversion rate encompasses many aspects of your site, including

usability, site availability and performance, and even the importance of the task to your customer.

Page 379: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 379/416

© SAP AG CR800 9-17

SAP AG2004

E-Analytics V

Overview E-Analytics

Sales Analyses

Web Site Monitoring

Web Analytics

Architecture

 

Page 380: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 380/416

© SAP AG CR800 9-18

SAP AG2004

E-Analytics Architecture

Interaction

usiness

Services

mySAP CRM

mySAP BW

Server 

Web Site MonitoringE-Selling Analysis

Presentation

Browser 

Browser 

Browser 

Browser 

SAP J2EE Engine

Internet SalesBusiness Events

Business Event API

 J  av a C  onn e c t   or 

 J  av a C  onn e c t   or 

W e b  S  er v er 

CRM Server 

Request

Response

Java Servlet API

Capture Pipeline

Request

Response

Canister,

Indexer &

Extractor 

Request

Response

 

Page 381: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 381/416

© SAP AG CR800 9-19

SAP AG2004

Summary: E-Analytics Provides ...

Sales Analyses

Analyzing the most important Sales KPIs for your Web shop

Technical Analyses

Detecting and solving of server and other technical problems

Customer Behavior Analyses

Measuring the success of your E-Commerce channel

Understanding customer behavior in your Web shop and applying

business strategies accordingly in:

Sales and Marketing

Product Management

Product Catalog and Web Design

 

Further Information:

  SAP Public Web: www.sap.com/crm

  SAP Marketplace: http://intranet.sap.com/crm-e-commerce

  SAP Help Portal: http://help.sap.com

(SAP Cross Industry Solutions ̈ SAP Customer Relationship Mgmt.  ̈ SAP CRM 4.0  ̈ E-

Commerce  ̈ E-Analytics) 

  SAP Solution Manager

Page 382: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 382/416

© SAP AG CR800 9-20

SAP AG2004

E-Analytics: Unit Summary

You are now able to:

Explain what kind of analyses SAP offers to improve you

E-Commerce solution

 

Page 383: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 383/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-1

SAP AG2004

Appendix

8. E-Servicea) Solution Search

b) Service Request Management

c) Complaints and Returns Managementin E-Commerce

9. E-Analytics

Appendix

Units

1. Foundation and Architecture

2. Shop and User Management

3. Catalog Setup

4. Order and Contract Processing

5. Price Determination and ATP

Check

6. Additional E-Selling Scenarios

7. E-Marketing

 

Page 384: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 384/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-2

SAP AG2004

Appendix

Use of the Solution Manager

Deployment

Live customers with CRM E-Commerce

E-Service: Applicable Targeted

Industries

Dynamic Personalization

 

Page 385: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 385/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-3

SAP AG2004

Appendix

Usage of the Solution Manager

Deployment

Live customers with CRM E-Commerce

E-Service: Applicable Targeted

Industries

Dynamic Personalization

 

Page 386: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 386/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-4

SAP AG2004

SAP Solution Manager 

SAP Solution Manager SAP Solution Manager SAP Solution Manager 

Functional ImplementationFunctional Implementation

Technical ImplementationTechnical Implementation

Implementation ofOperations

Implementation ofOperations Support DeskSupport Desk

Services for OperationsServices for Operations

Solution MonitoringSolution MonitoringProviding tools, content,

procedures and services

to implement and operate

your mySAP Business Suite solution

SAP Solution Manager – a Customer Platform for Implementationand Operation of mySAP Business Suite

Implementation Operations

 

  SAP Solution Manager supports you throughout the implementation and operation of SAP solutions. It

is a platform which supports the business solution life cycle, from the Business Blueprint through toconfiguration to production operation. SAP Solution Manager offers central access to preconfigured

content, tools, and methodology that you can use during the evaluation and implementation of your

systems.

  For implementation, these include:

  Contents for evaluating and implementing business solutions predefined by SAP.

  The ASAP methodology for the implementation of business solutions.

  Tried and tested implementation and test tools, for example the Implementation Guide (IMG) or the

Test Workbench.

  An authoring function that you can use to create your own project templates for your implementation project. This makes SAP Solution Manager an ideal tool for SAP partners and companies involved in

global rollouts.

  SAP Solution Manager Operations allows you to configure, administer and monitor systems and

 business processes for a solution. You can work with overall solutions as well as individual systems,

 business processes, and software components. You can also set up and run your own solution support.

Page 387: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 387/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-5

SAP AG2004

SAP Solution Manager – Use in Implementation

SAP Solution

AP Solution

Manager in

anager in

Implementation

mplementation

Configuration

Project

definition

Define Business

Blueprint

Customizing

synchronization

Authorization

Data

transfer 

End user

training and

documentation

Testing

Projectphase

Roadmaps

Project AdministrationCrossfunctions

Projectactivities

Issue Tracking/Status Monitoring/Reporting

Developments

Define

system landscape

Focus of tool support

ProjectPreparation

BusinessBlueprint

RealizationGo Live

& SupportFinal

Preparation

 

SAP Solution Manager supports you in all phases of the evaluation and implementation. You can perform

the following activities in an evaluation and implementation project with SAP Solution Manager:  Project Preparation: The Roadmaps contain information and procedures for all phases of your

implementation project. Your work with SAP Solution Manager really begins after the evaluation

 phase. The first step is to define your project in SAP Solution Manager.You enter administrative data in

the Project Administration transaction (for example, details of project dates and resources). You set the

 project scope and you define the system landscape you require for the implementation of your solution

during the project preparation phase.

  Business Blueprint: You define a Business Blueprint by documenting the organizational units, master

data, business scenarios, and business processes you require for the implementation of your solution.

During the Business Blueprint definition, you read the documentation supplied by SAP and partners,

create your own project documentation, and assign individual process steps to transactions.

  Realization: You configure your business scenarios in the development system. You check the testcases delivered with your solution and assign further test cases to individual processes and process

steps. You perform a consistency check for the Customizing of your business processes. In other words,

you check whether the Customizing is the same in the various application components. You

synchronize Customizing with Customizing Distribution. You can organize tests and reuse the test

cases selected during configuration. It is possible to carry out project analysis at any point during your

 project to obtain information on project status and on progress made in testing or configuration.

  Final Preparation and Go Live & Support: Perform remote SAP services and track their status. Monitor

and manage your systems using real-time alerts displayed in a system graphic, weekly SAP EarlyWatch

Alert Reports, and Central System Administration tasks.

Page 388: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 388/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-6

SAP AG2004

How to Use SAP Solution Manager in a Project

ProjectPreparation

BusinessBlueprint Realization

Go Live &Support

FinalPreparation

Project Definition and Description

Project type

Naming, roles, and language

Project standards (status, keywords, and documentation

types)

Timeframe

Define System Landscape

Development

Quality Assurance

Production

 

Page 389: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 389/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-7

SAP AG2004

How to Use SAP Solution Manager in a Project

ProjectPreparation

BusinessBlueprint Realization

Go Live &Support

FinalPreparation

Define Business Blueprint via Business Process Repository

Customer Business Process requirements, analysis, documentation, and

management /scoping

Visualization of Standard Business Process by scenario description,

product documentation, demos, and transactions

Project-specific adaptation such as new processes and documentation at

each level (requirements, print outs, reports, and concepts)

Generation of Blueprint

Project Issue Management, Status Management

SAP Feasibility Check

 

Page 390: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 390/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-8

SAP AG2004

How to Use SAP Solution Manager in a Project

ProjectPreparation

BusinessBlueprint Realization

Go Live &Support

FinalPreparation

Configuration

Configuration guides for Standard Business Scenarios

Configuration support per scoped structure element such as product

documentation, IMG, non-ABAP configuration, BC sets, and CATTs

Project documentation such as customizing, modification, and

enhancements

Customizing synchronization

Testing

Define and maintain test cases, test catalog

Organize and perform testing in Test Workbench

Project Issue Management such as questions, errors,

requests, and messages to SAP

 

Page 391: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 391/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-9

SAP AG2004

How to Use SAP Solution Manager in a Project

ProjectPreparation

BusinessBlueprint Realization

Go Live &Support

FinalPreparation

End User Training and Documentation

Part of implementation content

Standard Business Process and Customer Business Process

documentation

Product documentation

Project Issue Management such as errors, requests, and

messages to SAP

SAP GoingLive Check

SAP EarlyWatch Check

Solution Manager for Operations

 

Page 392: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 392/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-10

SAP AG2004

Implementation Content

Structure items

for generic configuration

support

Scenarios

Solution

General Settings

Connecting Systems

Data Replication

Engines

Portals

Basic Settings for <Solution>

Basic Settings for <Key Capability>

Basic Settings for <Channel>

Basic Settings for <Technology>

<Product Version>

Configuration Structures

Master Data

Organizational Units

...

Business Processes

<Scenario>

<Scenario>

...

Scenarios

<Solution>

 

Page 393: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 393/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-11

SAP AG2004

Implementation Content – Assignments

Trans-

action

Docu-

mentationTransactions

IMG activities

Other 

Docu-

mentation

(in the Help

Portal)

IMG

Docu-

mentation

Link to

With

Access

to

URLsGeneral Settings

Connecting Systems

Data Replication

Engines

Portals

Basic Settings for <Solution>

Basic Settings for <Key Capability>

Basic Settings for <Channel>

Basic Settings for <Technology>

<Product Version>

Configuration Structures

Master Data

Organizational Units

...

Business Processes

<Scenario>

<Scenario>

...

Scenarios

<Solution>

 

Page 394: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 394/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-12

SAP AG2004

Example: Configuration Concept for mySAP CRM 4.0

Basic

Settings

for 

Enterprise

Marketing

Basic

Settings

for 

Enterprise

Sales

BasicBasic

SettingsSettings

for for 

EnterpriseEnterprise

ServiceService

Basic

Settings

for 

Enterprise

Analytics

Basic Settings for mySAP CRM

Basic

Settings

for 

E-Comm.

Basic

Settings

for 

Field

Appl.

Basic

Settings

for 

Interaction

Center 

Basic

Settings

for 

Channel

Mgmt.

   M  o

   b   i   l  e   C   R   M

   M  o

   b   i   l  e   R   /   3

   H  a  n   d   h  e   l   d   C   R   M

   W   i  n   C   l   i  e  n   t

   W  e

   b   C   l   i  e  n   t

   I   S   A

   C   R   M

   I   S   A

   R   /   3

Basic Settings for all Business Scenarios

Basic Settings for all Business Scenarios

assigned to a Functional Key Capability

Basic Settings for all Business Scenarios

assigned to a Channel Key Capability

Business Scenarios and assigned settings

 

Page 395: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 395/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-13

SAP AG2004

Example: Basic Settings for any Handheld ServiceBusiness Scenario*

Basic

Settings

for 

Enterprise

Marketing

Basic

Settings

for 

Enterprise

Sales

BasicBasic

SettingsSettings

for for 

EnterpriseEnterprise

ServiceService

Basic

Settings

for 

Enterprise

Analytics

Basic Settings for mySAP CRM

Basic

Settings

for 

E-Comm.

Basic

Settings

for 

Field

Appl.

Basic

Settings

for 

Interaction

Center 

Basic

Settings

for 

Channel

Mgmt.

   M  o

   b   i   l  e   C   R   M

   M  o

   b   i   l  e   R   /   3

   H  a  n   d   h  e   l   d   C   R   M

   W   i  n   C   l   i  e  n   t

   W  e

   b   C   l   i  e  n   t

   I   S   A

   C   R   M

   I   S   A

   R   /   3

* Including

Analysis

Processes

For each Business Scenario the

required path is given in the

SAP Solution Manager 

a

b

d

e

c

 

Page 396: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 396/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-14

SAP AG2004

Appendix

Use of the Solution Manager

Deployment

Live customers with CRM E-Commerce

E-Service: Applicable Targeted

Industries

Dynamic Personalization

 

Page 397: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 397/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-15

SAP AG2004

Deployment

Build Tool

Supports building of project specific Web applications based on

the Internet Sales applications

Separation of project specific code and code delivered by SAP

Automated build of project specific applications

Software Delivery Manager (SDM) support for project specific

applications

Standardized process for upgrading modified Web applications

to a newer support pack or a newer release

Report of differences of two SAP releases and project specific

modifications

Automated build of the project specific applications based on the

new SAP application

SDM support for reuse of deployment parameters

 

Documentation:

  http://service.sap.com/crm-inst

  Installation Guides  mySAP CRM SAP CRM 3.1

  Link: CRM E-Selling

Use:

  XCM for configuration

  Build Tool for modifications

  SDM for deployment

Page 398: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 398/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-16

SAP AG2004

Build Tool – Difference Report

 

Upgrade Process:

  Download new application

  Extract it

  Generate Difference Report

  Review SAP differences (especially for files modified for the project and modified by SAP in the newer

version of the application)

  If required, merge conflicting changes manually or by VCS tools (based on Difference Report)

  Start automated build

  Deploy new project specific application

  Test

  Customer Enhancements with Build Tool

  Enhancements are stored in separate folder (application with own name, e.g., B2B_Modified)

  Upgrade sequence: SDM  EAR JSP_Modified

Page 399: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 399/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-17

SAP AG2004

Appendix

Use of the Solution Manager

Deployment

Live customers with CRM E-Commerce

E-Service: Applicable Targeted

Industries

Dynamic Personalization

 

Page 400: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 400/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-18

SAP AG2004

mySAP CRM E-Commerce Across All Industries

Consumer Products

High Tech & Electronics

Retail

Chemicals

Engineering &

Construction

Service Provider 

Forest Products & Paper  TelecommunicationsBuilding Materials, Clay & Glass

Oil & Gas

Metal ProductsUtilities

Automotive

Media

PharmaceuticalsTextiles ProductionsMiningPublic Sector Insurance

 

  mySAP CRM Customers span the breadth of industries, including High Tech, Consumer Products,

Retail, Chemicals, and Engineering & Construction.

Page 401: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 401/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-19

SAP AG2004

mySAP CRM E-Commerce – A Proven Success

 

Page 402: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 402/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-20

SAP AG2004

Manage a Complex Content and Demand Chain

Kimberly-Clarkruns mySAP CRM

Industry: Health Care Products

Scenario: Business-to-Business

Geography: USA

Kimberly-Clarkruns mySAP CRM

Industry: Health Care Products

Scenario: Business-to-Business

Geography: USA

“mySAP CRM E-Selling gave us the flexibility that we needed right from the beginning to push our

catalog content to any exchange, represent our brand strongly, and make it as easy as possible for our

business partners to engage in e-commerce with us.”

Ladd Nichols, Director of Global Strategic Information Systems, Kimberly Clark

“mySAP CRM E-Selling gave us the flexibility that we needed right from the beginning to push our

catalog content to any exchange, represent our brand strongly, and make it as easy as possible for our

business partners to engage in e-commerce with us.”

Ladd Nichols, Director of Global Strategic Information Systems, Kimberly Clark

 

  Kimberly Clark runs mySAP CRM E-Selling in their health care products division. It is a B2B scenario

in the U.S.

  Kimberly Clark has implemented multiple product hierarchies to manage content. Since content is is

strictly regulated in the health care industry, consistency of product-related, structured content is

critical. They sell complex products, such as surgical packs. Substitution of products has been

implemented, as well as cross-selling.

  Kimberly Clark is dealing with complex content and a complex demand chain. They push their catalog

to procurement exchanges for their business partners, where they have connected E-Selling to E-

Procurement for Health Care Products.

  Kimberly Clark runs mySAP CRM E-Selling in a heterogeneous environment; they run against multiple

 backend systems, including non-SAP backends.

  Through E-Selling, Kimberly Clark ensures ease of doing business for business partners, as well asstrong, centralized branding of their healthcare products.

Page 403: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 403/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-21

SAP AG2004

Fast ROI with Sophisticated B2B Capabilities

Tyrolitruns mySAP CRM

Industry: Building Material

Scenario: Business-to-Business

Geography: Austria

Tyrolitruns mySAP CRM

Industry: Building Material

Scenario: Business-to-BusinessGeography: Austria

“mySAP CRM E-selling from SAP reduces our cost per transaction by processing customer orders

automatically. Our Customer Service spends less time performing administrative tasks and more time

developing customer relationships.”Marcus Pieber, e-commerce Manager, Tyrolit

- Customer account maintenance costs: down 80%*

- Total cost savings: 25%* * ROI Report 6/2002 by Peppers & Rogers

“mySAP CRM E-selling from SAP reduces our cost per transaction by processing customer ordersautomatically. Our Customer Service spends less t ime performing administrative tasks and more t ime

developing customer relationships.”Marcus Pieber, e-commerce Manager, Tyrolit

- Customer account maintenance costs: down 80%*

- Total cost savings: 25%* * ROI Report 6/2002 by Peppers & Rogers

 

  Tyrolit runs mySAP CRM E-Selling to run their B2B site to sell building material in Austria and

Europe.

  Tyrolit incorporates contracts and order templates (for simplified recurring orders for customers).

  With mySAP CRM E-Selling, Tyrolit has reduced their cost per sales transaction and reduced their

administrative support in Customer Service.

  Tyrolit went live in four months, using mostly standard functionality. Their ratio of implementation

costs to software costs was 2:1.

  In an ROI study performed by Peppers and Rogers, Tyrolit estimates that customer account

maintenance costs have decreased by 80% with mySAP CRM and that their total cost savings is 25%.

  In addition, Tyrolit has upgraded from mySAP CRM 2.0c to mySAP CRM 3.0

Page 404: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 404/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-22

SAP AG2004

Fiduciaruns mySAP CRM

Industry: Service Provider 

Scenario: Business-to-Business

Geography: Germany

Fiduciaruns mySAP CRM

Industry: Service Provider 

Scenario: Business-to-BusinessGeography: Germany

“mySAP CRM E-Selling enables us to offer better services to our customers at lower costs. Thus, we

will build our Internet Sales Portal around mySAP CRM, making it our central sales channel for

standard offerings.“

Ingo Rieflin, Project Leader Fiducia Online Service

“mySAP CRM E-Selling enables us to offer better services to our customers at lower costs. Thus, we

will build our Internet Sales Portal around mySAP CRM, making it our central sales channel for

standard offerings.“

Ingo Rieflin, Project Leader Fiducia Online Service

95% cost reduction:Fiducia cut order handling costs

from $ 70 to $ 3.50 per order 

Configure-to-order at Lower Costs

 

  Fiducia runs mySAP CRM E-Selling to run their B2B site for selling hardware and services to banks in

Germany.

  Fiducia sells ATMs, PCs, mainframes, and leases of their network in the Web shop. Fiducia uses the

SAP Internet Pricing and Configurator (IPC) to enable customers to configure the appropriate network

connections and hardware products, to meet their business needs. Fiducia utilizes the nested

configuration capabilities of the IPC to ensure that compatible products, components, and networks are

chosen for the customer. In addition, Fiducia uses ATP checking at the component level to provide

accurate online delivery commitments to customers.

  Fiducia estimates a 95% cost reduction in their order handling with mySAP CRM E-Selling. With the

reduced time, cost, and errors in orders, Fiducia estimates that their order costs have dropped from $70

an order to $3.50 an order.

Page 405: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 405/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-23

SAP AG2004

Online Customer Service Center 

Canada Postruns mySAP CRM

Industry: Service Provider 

Scenario: Business-to-Consumer 

Business-to-Business

Geography: Canada

Canada Postruns mySAP CRM

Industry: Service Provider 

Scenario: Business-to-Consumer Business-to-Business

Geography: Canada

 

  Canada Post runs mySAP CRM E-Selling to enable business customers and end consumers to purchase

 products, manage their accounts and monitor shipments online.

  Canada Post combines both E-Selling and E-Service capabilities in their customer site. Canada post has

implemented a frameless UI for their Webshop for a very different look and feel that reflects their

corporate branding.

Page 406: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 406/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-24

SAP AG2004

Customer Specific Catalog & Pricing

“When we decided to leverage the Internet as a strategic sales channel, we knew there was the potential

for channel conflicts with resellers. With the Internet Sales component, we found an option that was not

only well-suited to our needs and robust, but also easy to implement and flexible enough to offer the sales

channel options that are most comfortable for us, our customers, and our business partners.“

Mehrdad Laghaeian, Vice President of Information Technology, Osram

Osram Sylvaniaruns mySAP CRM

Industry: High Tech

Scenario: Business-to-Business

Geography: U.S.A.

Osram Sylvaniaruns mySAP CRM

Industry: High Tech

Scenario: Business-to-Business

Geography: U.S.A.

 

  Osram Sylvania uses mySAP CRM to sell thousands of light bulbs, light systems, and diodes to

 business customers over the Web. Because of the technical nature of their products, product details,PDFs, and specifications are a critical part of their catalog. In addition, Osram supports customer-

specific pricing and discounts, so they maintain over 2.5 million condition records, which are

automatically updated on the Web shop.

Page 407: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 407/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-25

SAP AG2004

Make it an Impressive Customer Experience

Beck’sruns mySAP CRM

Industry: Consumer Products

Scenario: Business-to-Consumer 

Geography: Germany

Beck’sruns mySAP CRM

Industry: Consumer Products

Scenario: Business-to-Consumer 

Geography: Germany

“We wanted to help increase customer loyalty by making online shopping and customer interaction easy

and fun, at the same time leveraging analytics and campaign management capabilities as well as our

existing customer databases. SAP has fully met our expectations and helped us create the integrated CRM

and business processes necessary for success in a highly competitive global market.”

Oliver Braun, brand manager, Beck’s Germany

 

  Though Beck’s traditional business model is to sell its products through an indirect channel of

distributors and retailers.

  Beck’s uses mySAP CRM to sell logo merchandise, accessories, and collectables directly to end

consumers (and bars) via their corporate Web site. Corporate branding is critical for Beck’s; their goal

is to simply and easily distribute their branded merchandise to a wide audience. In addition, the

 branding of their Web shop experience is very important to Beck’s.

Page 408: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 408/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-26

SAP AG2004

KSBruns mySAP CRM

Industry: Engineering &

ConstructionScenario: Business-to-Business

Geography: Germany, Europe

KSBruns mySAP CRM

Industry: Engineering &

ConstructionScenario: Business-to-Business

Geography: Germany, Europe

Find the Right Spare Parts

 

  KSB uses mySAP CRM to sells pumps and spare parts over the Web. Business customers use the

 product configurator to customize the appropriate pumps to meet their business needs. KSB uses aguided selling search to lead customers to the right spare parts to meet their needs. KSB considers this

guided search functionality to be a competitive advantage for their business.

Page 409: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 409/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-27

SAP AG2004

Migrosruns mySAP CRM

Industry: RetailScenario: Business-to-Consumer 

Geography: Switzerland

Migrosruns mySAP CRM

Industry: Retail

Scenario: Business-to-Consumer 

Geography: Switzerland

Convenience Shopping @ Migros

 

  Migros uses mySAP CRM to sell groceries to consumers over the Web in Switzerland. Customers can

fill their baskets and schedule delivery dates and times online.

  Coop, the other leading retailer in Switzerland, also uses mySAP CRM E-Selling.

Page 410: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 410/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-28

SAP AG2004

Hershey’sruns mySAP CRM

Industry: Consumer Products

Scenario: Business-to-Reseller 

Geography: U.S.A.

Hershey’sruns mySAP CRM

Industry: Consumer Products

Scenario: Business-to-Reseller 

Geography: U.S.A.

My Chocolate World

 

  Hershey’s uses mySAP CRM to run their E-Commerce site for resellers. Resellers can place orders,

check on shipments, review invoices, and get product information online from Hershey’s OrderConnection.

Page 411: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 411/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-29

SAP AG2004

Appendix

Use of the Solution Manager

Deployment

Live customers with CRM E-Commerce

E-Service: Applicable Targeted

Industries

Dynamic Personalization

 

Page 412: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 412/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-30

SAP AG2004

E-Service: Applicable & Targeted Industries (1)

All industries that provide services for their customers,

for example:

Automotive

Scheduled inspections and services

Contract and warranty services, product recall services

Engineering, Construction, Operations

Commissioning and decommissioning services

Preventive and predictive maintenance services

High Tech

Software/hardware installation and upgrade services

IT helpdesk support and hotline services

Industrial Machinery Components

Scheduled inspections and services

Break-fix repair services

 

Page 413: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 413/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-31

SAP AG2004

E-Service: Applicable & Targeted Industries (2)

Service Providers

Professional and consultancy services

Utilities and Telecommunications

Energy supply, connection, and meter reading services

Broadband, cable, mobile communication services

Consumer Services

Consumer appliance repair services

Home services (HVAC)

Complaints and returns processing

Contract and warranty services

Public Sector

Public administration services via the Internet

 

Page 414: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 414/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-32

SAP AG2004

Appendix

Use of the Solution Manager

Deployment

Live customers with CRM E-Commerce

E-Service: Applicable Targeted

Industries

Dynamic Personalization

 

Page 415: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 415/416

© SAP AG CR800 Appendix-33

SAP AG2004

Dynamic Personalization

E-Selling Dynamic

Personalization

Utilizes the E-Selling

Personalization Engine

Enables the presentation of

dynamic product

recommendations, personalized

content, and real-time

suggestions/help/ideas

The personalized features can

be driven by actual user

behavior: contents of the

shopping basket, click streambehavior, and so on

 

  Dynamic Personalization differs from static personalization in that it interacts with the users in a much

more extensive nature. Dynamic Personalization can change the way the UI is displayed, via pop-upwindows or physically altering the base window. So, the UI itself can appear differently to different

users. As an analogy, think of a salesperson accompanying you through a department store and

answering your questions, pointing out special offers, and suggesting alternative (or additional)

 products based on what you have seen.

Page 416: CR800 Eselling

7/18/2019 CR800 Eselling

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr800-eselling 416/416

SAP AG2004

People-centric Internet Sales: Dynamic Personalization

Personalization

Engine

Web-based

Personalization

administration

Allows user to define

rules to react to user

data, current activity

Rules can trigger

personalized content,

product

recommendations or

other actions

Buying experience can

be influenced real-time

(e.g., based on

shopping basket

content)